九年级英语外研版上教学工作总结（精选多篇）

推荐第1篇：外研版九年级英语免费课件

一、复习中应遵循几个原则及策略：

（一）是抓住课本，有效复习。教材和课程标准是考前复习和考试命题的依据。

（二）是系统归纳，分清脉络。

（三）是专项练习，有的放矢。

二、重难点分析：

1.单词的复习

九年级新教材的突出特点是词汇量大，词汇是英语学习的基础，不熟练掌握单词，英语的学习将从我说起。因此要想方设法的搞好词汇的复习，把单词进行归类使学生容易掌握。

2、关于语法知识的复习

考试前需要复习的语法知识有：现在完成时、直接引语和间接引语、被动语态、代词的用法等。计划对语法知识进行全面的总结，并配合适量练习，让学生尽量达到懂语法并且会用语法。由此，减少或解除学生心中模糊的知识。复习语法时，要注重引导学生记住结构，能灵活运用到实际生活中去，运用学过的语法写句子，写简单的文章。

3．习题的设置：

九年级的内容多，容量大，时间紧。必须重视习题的质量。针对这种情况要精选部分试题进行强化训练，特别是学生容易错的，在复习中多加以巩固。

三、复习目标：

本次复习时间紧（大致有2周复习时间）、任务重，仍然采取以单元为单位进行复习。复习时以课本知识为主，兼顾习题。单词、语法、习题三项要彼此兼顾，要处理好三者之间的关系。

四、复习内容在教材整体结构中的作用：

九年级学生使用此教材时，大部分学生觉得知识的跨度较大，不少同学感到力不从心。因此，本次复习关系重大。对于学生知识的系统性，学习英语的自信心等都有极大的关系。2-4单元为复习重点，复习时要强调基础知识，建议学生将已学过的语法知识进行归纳分类，以便使零散的知识连贯起来。将词汇，语法作为复习重点，复习其他词类时多关注固定用法、平时常见的错误及教师课堂上提出应注意问题等。复习过程中以学生自检与教师检查相结合，及时反馈学习效果，注重复习的有效性。

五、倾向性问题及需要注意的问题：

有关课本的知识的要求，应该分层次进行。因为基础知识内容过多，要求所有同学全部掌握是不可能的。因此要进行分层次教学。 练习过程中采取逐步引导，渗透作题技巧，要注意培养学生的分析问题能力、解决问题能力。查缺补漏。 复习时要强调针对性和有效性。不搞题海战术，把各种针对性比较强的综合训练作为检查存在不足的工具，重点突破那些平时没有熟练掌握的内容。

注重复习技巧。现在学习时就应采取正确的解题技巧、思路和方法，包括在进行听力训练时。复习时把各类题型进行分析、归类，掌握解题方法，这样才能在解题时多角度深入地理解题意，拓宽解题思路。根据期中考试试卷分析出现的问题，加强学生听力及作文的练习。平时检测，注意狠抓学生出现的问题，努力确保大多数学生不犯同样的错误。

六.学生分析

1.有部分学生的基础较差,学习成绩较低

2.学生的解题方法与技巧掌握的不够好.

3.优生人数较少..

4.学习的写作与阅读练习与能力较弱.

5.九班的女生学习成绩较高，男生成绩较低.

6.少部分学生已经对英语的学习失去了兴趣与信心.

7.大部分学生的书写较好

推荐第2篇：外研版英语九年级上册说课稿

Module 1 Wonders of the world

Unit 2I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon.说课稿

各位专家、老师：

下午好！

很荣幸能有这个机会上这堂课，同时，也很忐忑。在座的各位都是资深教师了，都有一双火眼金睛，我的破绽，肯定是一览无余的。

首先，我就本节课的载体（即课文）稍作分析。

本文是谈论作者一次去科罗拉多大峡谷的旅游经历和对大峡谷的介绍。词汇量还是较多的。这篇文章是以游记形式的日记，所以，整篇文章的阅读是以时间轴为主线的。 接下来我按照我自己教学的设计稍微作一个解释。

课前播放的图片是2007年新选出来的7大奇迹，学生通过图片可以对世界奇迹有一些了解。Warming up部分是以长城为载体，讨论为什么长城是世界奇迹之一，随之呈现一些新词汇，（ wonder, ancient, man-made, disappear）为接下来的阅读减轻了负担。也激起了学生的自豪感。

Pre-reading 部分是直接用大峡谷的图片来导入，让学生就大峡谷有一点了解，也解决了一部分新词汇（edge, ottom, canyon, ）。

我为学生每步的阅读预设阅读目的，引导学生使用skimming和scanning等策略来完成阅读任务。本问的阅读设计是总-分-总。首先学生快速阅读后本文呈现的是一则日记的形式，然后根据内容将文章分为三大部分，这样就搭建起了本文的框架，使学生对文本有了明晰的了解，然后再仔细阅读，并引导学生按事情的发展顺序去阅读本文。

第一部分（on the way），主要是信息的提取，其中还有一个猜词 “replay”，这一个题型我在以前不够重视，是上次我们学校校本教研活动时，王老师给我们学校的老师评课时讲到了我们平时阅读课上，可以适当练习一些考试题型，其中猜词就是很好的一个训练，我觉得在课堂上的不知不觉的渗透比讲解考卷时更有效。

第二部分（on the edge），有信息的提取，但是更关注写作中的描写，可以说是细节描写吧。让学生用几个句子自己去体会，并引导学生从事实中去判断作者的观点和情感，也为读后的写作提供一些模仿的依据吧。

第三部分（after the travelling），主要是分析作者对大峡谷的看法，旨在告诉学生在写作过程中也要善于表达情感或观点。

最后环节的任务是让学生对作者的日记进行改写，在改写中，注意写一篇日记的要点。（时间、地点、人物、事情、还有适当的自己的看法）。

最后输出部分，是设想自己曾经去过一个奇迹之地，先合作讨论，最后独立写作。 我经验不够，见识浅薄，还望各位多多指教。

推荐第3篇：外研版九年级英语上册教学计划

外研版九年级英语

上

册

教

学

计

划

金传郁 2013-9-

1一 学情分析

今年我任教九年级一二两班英语。从整体情况来看，学生普遍英语基础较差，兴趣不高，甚至有部分学生的听说读写能力还不及 小学三年级水平，所以在课堂教学时，出现有学生不守课堂规则，不愿听课、睡觉或是做与课堂无关事情的现象，难以形成英语学习氛围。也有少部分学生基础较好，自制能力较强，能认真听课，按老师要求完成各项任务。总的来说，这两个班的英语教学具有挑战性，需要耗费不少时间和精力。

二 教材分析

本校九年级英语是外研版版英语，教材编排有以下特点：

1 本书共12个模块（两个复习模块除外），每个模块有3个单元，第一单元侧重听说能力培养，第二单元为阅读写作课，第三单元为复习单元，侧重语法运用。

2 该书.要使学生受到听、说、读、写的基本技能训练，掌握最基础的语言知识和语言技能以及培养初步英语交际的能力；养成良好的外语学习习惯，掌握学习外语的基本方法；为进一步学习和运用英语打下扎实的基

3 该书主要语法是被动语态及定语从句。

三 教学安排

依据本书情况及本学期的教学时间，本学期具体安排如下：

每周上一个模块左右，期中考试前上完前6个模块，其余的模块期中考试后至期末上完。

课程安排及教学进度：

周次模块模块内容

第1周Module 1Wonders of the world

第2周Module 1andModule 2 Great books

第3周Module 2andModule 3Sporting life

第4周Module 3 and a test

第5周National holiday

第6周Module 4 Great inventions

第7周Module 5 Museums

第8周Module 6Save our world

第9周Module 6 and a test

第10周Module 7 Australia

第11周Module 8Photos

第12周Module 9 Carton stories

第13周Module 10Fitne

第14周Module 10 and a test

第15周Module 11 Population

第16周Module 12Summer in LA

第17周Module 12 and a test

第18-20周Revision for the final examination

四 教学措施

1、依据学生以上情况，要激发他们的英语学习兴趣。

2、重视课堂教学质量，逐步提高学生英语交际能力。

3、有意识培养学生的朗读、书写和作业的基本能力。

4、要因材施教 ，要进行分层次教学。对于好的学生要加大知识的容量，拓展知识的层面，使好学生成绩更上一层楼；对于差生要因势利导，因材施教，使差生在原有的基础上有所提高。

推荐第4篇：外研版英语九年级上册单词

九年级上册单词

MODULE 1

wondern.奇迹vt.想知道,对...好奇 bandn.乐队 reviewn.评论

ancienta.远古的,古老的 compositionn.作文 graden.成绩；年级 pyramidn.金字塔 pupiln.学生 meetingn.会议 listen up注意听

callvt.叫做,名为；打电话 eventn.事件；比赛项目 naturala.天然的；自然的get out of从...内出来，离开 lighta.明亮的 n.光线;灯 replyvi.回答

clearv.散开；打扫干净 a.清晰的 risevi.升起 groundn.地面

belowprep.在…下面 edgen.边，边缘

on the edge of处于...的边缘 bottomn.底部

at the bottom of在...的底部 canyonn.峡谷 siden.边，面，侧 disappearvi.消失 distancen.距离 hugea.巨大的

facev.面对，面临 n.脸 sightn.景象，景观 heightn.高度 liftn.电梯 viewn.景色 attractvt.吸引 descriptionn.描述 locationn.地点，位置

MODULE 2

workn.(常复)作品 influencevt.影响 respectvt.尊敬,尊重 thinkern.思想家 wisea.睿智的

as far as就…来说；至于 not...any more不再...

monthlya.每月一次的，每月的 literaturen.文学 millions of数百万的 behaviourn.行为，举止 caven.山洞,洞穴 freedomn.自由 funeraln.葬礼

outsidern.局外人，外来人 sociala.社会的 themen.主题

treasuren.宝藏，财宝 clevera.聪明的

run awayv.潜逃,逃跑 deada.死的

for a timeadv.暂时, 一度 pleaseda.高兴的 alivea.活着的

grow up成长，长大成人 talk about谈论 southerna.南方的 staten.州，邦；状态 versionn.版本 historicala.历史的 editorn.编辑

publishern.出版者，出版社 reviewern.评论家

MODULE 3

sportinga.有关体育运动的 allowvt.允许 defeatvt.打败

seasonn.赛季；季节 stand for代表；象征

againstprep.与...相对，相反；靠，依 tougha.艰苦的；强硬的 encouragev.鼓励 medaln.奖章,奖牌

overnighta.突如其来的，持续整夜的 recordn.最高记录vt.记录

setvt.设置;制定set up建立；创立 yearbookn.年鉴 first of all首先

representvt.代表,象征 advertisementn.广告 coachn.教练

regularlyad.有规律地

sportsmann.运动员，男运动员 hurdlen.栏架 v.跨栏赛跑 hurdlingn.跨栏赛跑 sportswomann.女运动员 racevi.比赛

discuionn.讨论 awardv.授予

finishing line终点线 marathonn.马拉松 turnn.跑道

taekwondo跆拳道 beltn.带子

MODULE 4

printingn.印刷

advantagen.优点,优势 digitala.数码的

digital camera数码相机 batteryn.电池 chargevt.充电

favourn.帮助；喜爱 publishvt.出版 iuen.(报刊)期

ordinarya.平常的,普通的,平凡的 agen.时期，时代；年龄 replacevt.代替 see to负责，注意 producevt.生产

inventionn.发明 look through浏览 createv.创造 cottonn.棉花 woodn.木材 at a time一次 by hand用手工 inkn.墨水

blockn.板子；街区

at the beginning of在...的开始 knowledgen.知识 spreadvt.散播，传播 introductionn.传入；介绍 rather than而不是...CD-ROM只读光盘 one day某天 feathern.羽毛

dryv.(使)干燥，使(变干) a.干的，干燥的sharpenvt.磨快，削尖 steeln.钢，钢铁

fountain pen自来水笔，钢笔 popularityn.普及，流行 ballpoint penn.圆珠笔

MODULE 5

entryn.进入；参加，登记；入口；参赛作品

photographyn.摄影 familiara.熟悉的 attentionn.注意力

pay attention to集中注意力于

upstairsad.在楼上，向楼上 n.楼上 guardn.保卫 signn.标志 as well也

downstairsad.在楼下；向楼下 sculpturen.雕像

eitheradj.两者之一的 experimentn.实验 exhibitn.展品

unusuala.不同寻常的

work out设法弄懂，计算出 try out试用，试验，检验 Launch Pad起飞坪；发射台 Physicsn.物理 fallinga.下降中的 sandn.沙子 truckn.卡车 wheeln.轮子 positionn.位置 rocketn.火箭

travelvi.旅行 n.旅行 humann.人类 a.人类的 speedn.速度 obeyv.遵守 above all首先 drop in顺便走访 as...as同…一样

communicationn.交流，沟通 courtn.球场 storev.储存

cloakroomn.衣帽间 toiletn.厕所

inventorn.发明家 cafen.咖啡厅

MODULE 6

wasten.浪费 v.浪费 wastefula.浪费的

throw away扔掉，抛弃 metaln.金属 energyn.能量 pollutionn.污染

recyclevt.循环，再生，再利用readern.读者

environmentala.环境的 reusablea.可重新使用的 hopelea.希望渺茫的 reducevt.减少,减小 reusevt.重新利用 necearya.有必要的 plastica.塑料制的 n.塑料

repairev.修复 chinan.陶瓷

carev.在意，关心；担心 fashionn.风尚 insteadprep.代替

instead of代替, 而不是… air conditioningn.空调 clothn.布 sortv.挑拣 harmn.伤害

do harm to对...造成伤害 differencen.差别，差异

make a difference to对...产生重大影响/很重要

productn.产品 materialn.材料 bottlen.瓶子

boilv.煮沸，烧开 wildlifen.野生动植物

REVISION MODULE A accidentn.事故 put up张贴，挂起

joinvt.参加；连接；加入 networkn.网络

businepeoplen.商人 scientifica.科学的 multimedian.多媒体 hardwaren.硬件

communicatev.交流，沟通 softwaren.软件

(be) made up of组成，构成 a number of许多

normala.常规的；正常的 snailn.蜗牛

MODULE 7

crocodilen.鳄鱼

sharkn.鲨鱼 handn.协助；手

have a look at看...一眼

alongsideprep.在…的旁边，沿着… detailn.细节 grapen.葡萄 hamn.火腿 lambn.小羊肉 outbackn.内陆

relativen.家人，亲戚 sheepn.绵羊

spiritn.灵魂；神灵 surfingn.冲浪 winen.(葡萄)酒 helicoptern.直升机 purplen.紫色a.紫色的 similara.相似的,类似的 similar to同...相似 ourspron.我们的 cricketn.板球(运动) rugbyn.橄榄球 sunshinen.阳光

expreionn.短语，表达方式 maten.同伴 tempern.脾气

lifestylen.生活方式 water sports水上运动 greyn./a.灰色(的) ancestorn.祖先，先人

MODULE 8

on the left在左边 on the right在右边 troublen.麻烦 shotn.照片 kidv.开玩笑 expectv.盼望 pick up接；拣起

historica.有历史意义的 even though即使 sizen.规模

beautyn.美丽

categoryn.类别，种类 movementn.运动，动作 featuren.以...为特点 includevt.包括

richa.富有的；丰富的 congratulationn.祝贺 photographern.摄影师 presentvt.授予 n.礼物 ceremonyn.典礼

frightenedadj.吓坏的

MODULE 9

cartoonn.卡通

flashn.闪光；闪光灯 drawingn.图画 over there那边 wordn.言语

have a word with和某人说几句话 cuteadj.逗人喜爱的,漂亮的 heavenn.天堂，天国 lovablea.可爱的 men.混乱；杂乱 monstern.怪物

privatea.私人的；秘密的 heartn.心脏,心

win the heart of赢得...的心

everywheread.在各个地方；处处 handbagn.手提包

favouriten.喜爱的东西(或人) a.特别喜欢的

leadv.领导 rulen.统治 peachn.桃子

commona.常用的 bon.老板，雇主 surfacen.表面

ever since从...开始

Belgiana.比利时的 n.比利时人 cartoonistn.漫画家，卡通画家 seriesn.系列

experiencev.&n.经历，体验 creatorn.创造者 latea.逝世的；迟的 singlea.单一的

MODULE 10 fitnen.健康 achev.&n.疼，痛 exercisen.锻炼，练习runningn.跑步 weightn.重量 weight lifting举重 give up放弃

unlikelya.不太可能的 bumpv.碰，撞击 bump intov.碰见

interestv.感兴趣 n.兴趣 junk food垃圾食品 sugarn.糖

tastya.美味的，好吃的 menun.菜单 chipn.薯条 behavev.表现

pastan.意大利面食 persuadevt.说服 cookingn.烹饪 banvt.禁止 educatevt.教育 typicala.典型的 disadvantagen.缺点 dietn.日常饮食

advertisev.做广告，登广告

MODULE 11

populationn.人口 crowdn.人群 increasev.增加

smoken.烟，烟雾 v.吸烟 increasinga.增长的 along with与…一起

minuten.分钟

percentn.百分之一 appointmentn.约会 thanks to由于 crimen.犯罪 flatn.(英)公寓 lawn.法律 rubbishn.垃圾

suburbn.城郊住宅区 taxn.税

visionn.景象，幻影 addv.增加

add to向...增加 faultn.错误 policen.警察

curev.治愈，治好，治疗

MODULE 12

accommodationn.住处 shortsn.短裤

sunglaesn.太阳镜 trousersn.裤子 guestn.客人 coursen.课程 hostn.主人

paagen.一段，一节 well-trained训练有素的 experiencedadj.经验丰富的 progren.进步

make progre取得进步 arrangev.安排 variousa.不同的 organizevt.组织

place of interest旅游胜地 fill in填写

applicationn.申请 formn.表格 addren.地址 lengthn.长度

bookn.书 vt.预定

check in(在旅馆)登记入住；(在机场)办理登机手续

REVISION MODULE B jacketn.夹克

stationn.(澳大利亚或新西兰的)大牧场 woodena.木制的 extraa.额外的

contactvt.接触,与…联系

推荐第5篇：外研版初三英语上学期教学工作总结(精)

初三英语教学工作总结

忙忙碌碌中这学期又接近了尾声,这学期我担任初三(2和三(3班的英 语教学。 为了进一步提高自己的教育教学能力, 总结教学经验, 我把这学期的这 学期的教育教学工作走下总结,以便于日后取得更好的教学效果。

一、了解学生备好课是上好课的基础

教学就是教与学,两者是相互联系,不可分割的,有教者就必然有学者。学 生是被教的主体。 因此, 了解和分析学生情况, 有针对地教对教学成功与否至关 重要。不懂得了解学生对教学的重要性,只是专心研究书本,教材,想方设法令 课堂生动, 学生易接受, 这是很容易碰钉子的。 在上课前要了解清楚学生的实际 情况: 我所执教的两个班里,(2班的学生比较活跃,上课气氛积极,但中等生 占较大多数,尖子生相对较少。因此,讲得太深,就照顾不到整体,而(3班 的学生比较沉静, 虽然优良生比例大, 但中下层面而也有一小部分, 我备课时也 注意到这点, 因此教学效果比较理想。 从此可以看出, 了解及分析学生实际情况, 实事求是,具体问题具体分析,做到因材施教,对授课效果有直接影响。这就是 教育学中提到的“备教法的同时要备学生”。 这一理论在我的教学实践中得到了 验证。

教学中,备课是一个必不可少,十分重要的环节,备学生,又要备教法。备 课不充分或者备得不好, 会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性, 因此, 每天我都花费大 量的时间在备课之上,认认真真钻研教材和教法,不满意就不收工。虽然辛苦, 但事实证明是值得的。

一堂准备充分的课, 会令学生和我都获益不浅。 我认真研究了课文, 找出了 重点, 难点, 准备有针对性地讲。 相反, 我没有认真备课的时候, 课堂气氛沉闷, 教学效果不好, 与此相比可见, 认真备课对教学十分重要。 特别是对英语这门学 生不甚熟悉并感到困难的外语来说至关重要。

备课充分, 能调动学生的积极性, 上课效果就好。 但同时又要有驾驭课堂的 能力, 因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学。 因此上课一定要设

法令学生投入,不让其分心,这就很讲究方法了。上课内容丰富,现实。教态自 然,讲课生动,难易适中照顾全部,就自然能够吸引住学生。所以,老师每天都 要有充足的精神,让学生感受到一种自然气氛。这样,授课就事半功倍。

二、兴趣是最好的老师

英语是一门外语,对学生而言,既生疏又困难,在这样一种大环境之下,要 教好英语, 就要让学生喜爱英语, 让他们对英语产生兴趣。 否则学生对这门学科 产生畏难情绪,不愿学,也无法学下去。为此,我采取了一些方法,就是尽量多 讲一些关于英美国家的文化,生活故事,让他们更了解英语,更喜欢学习英语。 因为英语的特殊情况,学生在不断学习中,会出现好差分化现象,差生面扩大, 会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此,绝对不能忽视。为此,我制定了具体的计划 和目标。 对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。 经过这学期的努力, 收到了很好的效 果。

三、注重听、说、读、写全面发展

根据现行大纲的要求, 采取科学的教学方式, 要求学生眼耳手齐动, 提高记 忆的速度和持续记忆的时间, 以便更好地锻炼学生读的能力, 听的能力以及写的 能力,以便于形成良好的学习习惯,使不同类型的学生都得到良好的发展。 英 语是语言。因此,除了课堂效果之外,还需要让学生多读,多讲,多练。为此, 在早读时, 我坚持下班了解早读情况, 发现问题及时纠正。 课后发现学生作业问 题也及时解决,及时讲清楚,让学生即时消化。另外,对部分不自觉的同学还采 取强硬背诵等方式,提高他们的能力。

在这一学期的教学过程中, 我尽力地做好每项工作。 其中学到的东西固然不 少, 但不足之处也很多。 我会在以后的工作中进一步提高自己的各方面能力, 争 取让学生有更大的进步。

推荐第6篇：九年级英语上教学工作总结

九年级英语上教学工作总结

今年本人带九年级（2）班和（3）班的英语教学工作。在各级领导的关怀和指导下，圆满完成了教学任务，现在将一学期的教学工作做简要回顾。

九年级是整个初中阶段的重要一年，为使学生在英语这门学科上取得更大的进步，在中考中取得优异的成绩，我在教学中尝试了一些教学方法，现总结如下：

一、认真搞好备课，特别是集体备课。教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，既要备教材、备学生，又要备教法。备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。因 此，了解和分析学生情况，有针对地教对教学成功与否至关重要至关重要。这两个班在经过两年多的英语教学，在英语学习方面有很大的起色，但那是远远不足的， 而且九（2）班待转化生占较大多数，尖子生相对较少。因此，讲得太深，就照顾不到整体，时间长了，学生的学习积极性就会欠佳。但是，九（3）班优良生比例大，但中下层面而也广，我备课时注意到这点，因此教学时针对不同情况，在授课时采取了不同的方法。效果就比较理想。

二、培养学生良好的英语学习习惯

我校的学生在小学时没有系统的学习过英语，学生对学习英语的气氛不是很浓，学习自觉性较差，主要表现在以下几个方面：

1、学过的单词，老师要求背出，学生总是借口其他作业太多，没时间背等，往后一拖再拖，即便能背出来，也是临时死记抢记出来的。等到其他需要的时候又忘了。

2、上过的新课，相应的配套练习，不自觉去独立完成，总需要老师再三强调，但学生总希望老师和他们一起来做。

3、死记硬背的东西多，联系的东西少，因此表面上看感觉还可以，但真正一考起来，问题出来很多，而且差距很大。经过几次考试下来，问题也出来了，我任教的两个班：尖子生不多，中等生少，差生面特大。针对以上情况，要改变这种局面，我觉的要做的事很多。

首先，要培养学生良好的学习习惯，课前多预习，课堂45分钟让学生集中注意力听讲，把老师讲的内容真正听懂。不能似懂非懂。课后认真完成配套的巩固练习，不懂的地方，多向老师或成绩稍好的学生请教。

其次，学生学习要主次分明，主要学科课后时间分配相应的因当多一些，特别是对英语学科，因为他毕竟不是母语。基础不打好，以后想提高也难。

第三，要灵活掌握学过的知识点，学习要讲究方法，举一反三，融会贯通，只有这样，学生才能把所学的知识串联起来，不容易忘记。总之，要让学生明白，学习英语不是一天两天的事，是要靠平时慢慢积累起来的。

三、建设高效的课堂，努力提高驾驭课堂的能力。因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学，所以上课一定要设法吸引学生，不让其分心，上课内容力求丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。另外，我每天都坚持保持充足的精神，让学生感受到一种积极上进的气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。为了让学生真正参入到课堂中来，凡是学生自己能讲清楚的问题，都让学生自己解决，老师决不越俎代庖，课堂上尽量精讲、少讲，把时间都留给学生。

四、加强课外辅导。英语学习是语言的学习。因此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持认真了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强制背诵等方式，帮助他们养成良好习惯，提高他们的英语学习能力。

五、培优和辅差总结。因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。我把这批同学分为三个组。第一组是有能力提高，但平时懒动脑筋不学的同学，对这些同学，我采取集体辅 导，给他们分配固定任务，不让他们有偷懒的机会，让他们发挥应有水平；第二组是肯学，但由于能力不强的同学。对这部分同学要适当引导，耐心教导，慢慢提 高他们的成绩，不能操之过急，且要多鼓励。只要他们肯努力，成绩有望能提高；第三组是纪律松散，学习不认真，基础又不好的同学。对这部分人要进行课余时间 个别辅导。因为这部分同学需要一个安静而又不受干扰的环境，才会立下心来学习。只要坚持辅导，这些同学基础重新建立起来，以后授课的效果就会更好。

总之，通过一学期的努力，这两个班的成绩有所提高，在今年的初中学业考试中也取得了比较优异的成绩。因此，无论怎样辛苦，我都会继续努力，多问，多想，多学习，争取进步。

以上就是我在本学期的教学工作总结。许多地方存在不足，希望在未来的日子里，能在各位领导和老师指导下，取得更好成绩。

推荐第7篇：九年级英语上教学工作总结

九年级英语上教学工作总结

---- 张月琴

2009年的第一学期，我担任902班英语教师的工作，负责这个班的英语教学工作。初三教学是学校教学中的重中之重，为了不辜负同事的信任和部领导的期望，也本着“为每一个学生负责、让每一个家长满意”的宗旨，我全身心地投入教学工作中。一个学期来，主要做了以下的工作：

一、注重学习品质和学习能力的培养，提高学生的学习效率和学习质量。

(一)以教书育人为本，对学生进行品德的学习教育，思想品质和学习有着极其重要的关系。特别是后进生，关心他们学习习惯的养成和学习动力的培养，创建和谐班级学习氛围。

（二）开展有效课堂教学，营造愉快学习的课堂气氛。处处体现人文关怀和谐互动的教学模式，再简单重复的讲解也一定要有足够的耐心、设计出更多新的灵活的探求方法。

二、按照教学常规五个环节开展教学工作。

（一）教案的设计与时俱进。课前认真地备好每一节课，写好教案。针对不同的学生分析、概括、表达能力的特点，设计好教学方法。精心预设才可能巧妙生成。

（二）贴近生活、教育无痕。课堂上尽可能调动学生的学习积极性，让学生多动手，多动口，多动脑，让课堂气氛活跃起来，充分调动学生的主观能动性，力图让学生学有所得。尽可能让学生自然溶入教学生活。

（三）多元评价走进课堂、分层作业和分组辅导：作业的布置适量，有针对性，重点放在基础句型、基本语法等训练，作业都能做到全批全改，并做好评讲工作，有能力的学生提倡自学和自测。对学生的辅导方面，做到有耐心，有方法，因材施教，作业分层布置，尤其是对学生的口语作业，让不同层次的学生完成不同层次的口语作业，或朗读或背诵，深受学生的好评。

（四）细节决定成败，注重考试经验。学校的每次考试，都能做到查漏补缺，从中改正教学方法，也让学生调整学习方法，试卷评讲采取师生互动、课堂辩论等多种形式，决不将知识空白遗漏。

（五）积累是学习的最好方法。充分利用早、晚读，鼓励学生大胆读书，平时让学生在日常生活中，多说英语，训练学生的口语能力提高学生的学习兴趣。作文在中考越来越来重视。作文教学主要传授写作方法，要求学生要写真情实感的东西，不合格的要重写，强调字数和书写这些硬件的东西，平时提倡学生利用时间用英语写一些简短的文章，从中提高学生的写作能力。积极配合班主任的工作，和班主任多联系，沟通，互相促进学生的英语学习。

三、工作感言：

（一）三分教育 七分等待 三分教诲，指教要适量。说教过多，学生会产生逆反心理，效果反而不好。七分等待，是指教师对孩子要有耐心。如果急躁，便会与孩子产生矛盾。教育有时需要等待，需要孩子自己去慢慢亲身体验。

（二）低效学习也是一种浪费，因为记忆的效果不好。不间断无休止的重复，对于记忆没有什么好处，因为大脑细胞之间不会建立永久的联系。

（三）教育理念——“少食多餐”。不断重复确实可以加深记忆，但更关键的是，在这些重复的过程中，要有适当的时间间隔。

（四）快乐学习是提高学习效能的法宝，课外辅导其实更多在于和谐师生关系，培养学生学习动力。

四、存在问题：

任教的班级中，学习分层现象出现，共同提高是当务之急。单词记忆和句型记忆一定有更省力、更科学的方法，多介绍灵活方便的学习技巧。深入浅出是良法。

五、今后要在这两个方面下些功夫：

1、对新接手的班级，利用学生对新教师好奇和美好的期望、积极全面地做好潜能生工作。抓住契机培养师生情感和学习兴趣。

2、对潜能生进行帮教，多开展学生之间的合作学习、小组学习、课余辅导。使他们改变学习态度，努力学习。要坚信只要付出努力，学生一定有较大的进步。

推荐第8篇：外研版英语..

外研版（三起）六年级英语上册教案

Module 4 Unit 1 Happy Thanksgiving

一、学情分析

在这一模块中，让学生学习、了解不同的中外节日。谈论在不同的节日人们做什么、吃什么、看到什么等等。让学生了解不同节日的风俗，特别是了解外国节日的风俗，培养学生的跨文化意识。

重点、难点 重点：中国四大节日的英语表达法，会用英语描述这些节日。 难点：用英语描述中国的节日。

目标定位

写单词。

能力目标：会描述本国的四大节日的特色。

情感目标：通过学习中国的四大节日，使学生了解四大节日的特色，并会用英语表达。

二、教学过程

1.Warm-up热身复习

全班齐唱歌曲“We wish you a happy Christmas.”引导学生进入教学环境。老师可适当把歌曲音乐延长，烘托今天教学中节日的主题。

引导学生说出他们了解的西方节日明称，例如：Christmas, Halloween等等。再引导学生说一说关于这两个节日的情况，例如：它们分别在什么时间？按照传统，人们 在这两个节日里会做些什么？

2.Pre-task任务呈现

教师向学生们出示与圣诞节相关的图片，请单个学生回答问题，例如：“When is the Christams Day? Do you like it? What do people do on Christams ?”可以用同样的方式谈论万圣节。

出示美国国旗，提问学生是否了解美国有一个关于国旗的节日。告诉学生，美国有一个传统的“Flag Day”.引导学生开始今天的课文学习。

3.New Teaching课文教学

把教学挂图贴在黑板上，播放录音或是教学VCD呈现SB活动1的内容。请学生们看着图认真听。播放三遍提出不同的要求。

辅导学生对重点词汇及语句的发音，对学生的进步及时进行鼓励。

学生理解和掌握了主要词汇以后，再放两遍录音，请学生在跟读的同时思考一些具体问题。文中Daming和Simon谈到了哪几个美国节日？它们分别是什么？人知识目标：通过听录音、看音标、跟读等形式能够听、说、读、些、

们以什么方式庆祝这些节日？

a.What are the two American festivals in the story?

b.What do people do on Flag Day?

c.What do people do on Thanksgiving Day?

让学生跟读课文中的句子，每句之后停顿，要求学生重点模仿句子的语音语调。

教师尽可能多的学生起立跟读。

4.Practice练习

请学生看SB本单元活动2的图片，试着谈一谈图片中的内容。然后放录音，请

学生认真听，再放录音，让学生跟读。请学生两人一组重复对话。

完成SB活动3.S1:Can you tell me something about Christmas?

S2: Well, Christmas is my favorite festival.There is Father Christmas.He gives

presents to the children.

S1: Can you tell me more about it?

S2: People have special dinners and they have Christmas tree…

其后，可以让学生编排关于圣诞节的表演剧。

引导学生讨论中国的主要节日——春节。

5.Summary 小结

教师总结：Today we have learned how to talk about festivals.

6.Homework家庭做业

a.听录音，读句子，尝试背诵课文

b.用英语描述你最喜欢的节日，试着写一篇小短文。

三、巩固与拓展训练:

选一选，填一填。

1、Thanksgiving is myfestival.

A.likeB.favouriteC.best

2.We watch a football gameTV.

A.onB.inC.from

3.What dodo on Flag Day?

carryflag with my friends.

A.you; MyB.you; YouC.you; I

火眼金睛，找出句子错误之处。

（）

1、We watch the basketball game inTV.

()2.Can you tell me more with it, Mary?关注点、修改补充

()3.What do your do on Christmas Day?

小贴士：小学英语教学

英语学习、英语教学越来越受到人们的普遍重视。随着时代的发展和社会的进步，英语

已从一种工具变成了一种思想，一种知识库。没有掌握英语犹如缺乏一种思想，缺少了一个

重要的知识源泉。可以这样说，学会英语，不但多了一双眼睛，一对耳朵，和一条舌头，甚

至是多了一个头脑！因为语言是人类思维的工具，认识世界的工具，掌握一种语言也即掌握

了一种观察和认识世界的方法和习惯。

从日常工作中的点点滴滴，总结以下几点反思：

一、靠持续不断的语言知识，而不是"玩"来培养学生持久的兴趣

小学英语教学是要重视培养兴趣，但单靠唱歌游戏不能培养学生持久的兴趣。新鲜劲儿

一过，孩子们就会厌倦。所以，唱歌游戏应该作为小学生学习英语语言知识、技能的一些手

段，而不是培养兴趣的手段。我们可以采用多种手段帮助小学生在记忆力强的时期多记单词，

多学习语言规则，并尽可能多创造模仿的机会，提高学生的语音和语调。在英语学习中，听、

说、读、写、译五种能力是可以互补的。真正做到听说先行，读写跟上。光听说不读写，很

难收到高效。只靠模仿不培养学习能力，也难减轻学习负担。所以小学生还是应当认真进行

语言学习。

二、英语应用能力需要相应的词汇。

而目前在小学的低年级的英语教学中，不要求学生掌握词汇，而只要求学生能根据提示

或图片说出该单词，其本质无非是要学生们死记硬背，鹦鹉学舌。由于小学生们没有相应的

读音规则训练，不熟悉词汇的拼写规则，单词的音、形、意三者不能有效的结合在一起，因

而导致了单词记忆的困难，并成了小学生学英语的困难。

三、努力培养学习兴趣。

英语教师的教学重点是放在教学内容，教学大纲和考试形式上呢，还是将教学注重点转

移到学生的性格、兴趣、情绪等方面的培养和控制？这是，现代教育思想转变的重大原则问

题。事实证明，认为自己"民主、开放、平静、友好、体贴、乐于助人、聪明、富于逻辑性

和快乐"的人，一般来说，其学习英语成功的可能性要大于与上述性格相反或相差极大的学习者。另外，在外语学习过程中，由于外界因素的影响，学习者会出现焦虑沮丧烦躁不安等

情况，英语教师作为教学活动的组织者，应注意对外语学习者情感因素的培养和控制。尤其

是在小学的低年级阶段，英语教师要培养对学生的亲近感。在课堂教学中英语教师要十分尊

重学生，注意激励学生，关注学生学习过程。在当前"减负"工作中，英语教师尤其要注意

体察学生在课堂上的心理感受，亲近学生，使学生喜爱英语教师和英语课，从而提高英语课

堂教学的效益。

推荐第9篇：外研英语九年级上册M1M7复习作文

M1假设你在巴黎旅游，参观了the Eiffel Tower.请根据下列提示写一篇英语短文介绍这一景点。

内容包括：1.位置：法国的首都---巴黎

2.历史：埃菲尔铁塔得名于它的设计师（designer）Gustave Eiffel,1887年起建，1889年建成。 3.建筑特点 塔分为三层：

一、二层设有餐厅；第三层建有观景台（viewing platform） 4.其他信息：每年有大量的游客来参观；它是法国文化的象征。

M2.假如你是王博，你的澳大利亚笔友Jim很想了解中国传统节日—春节。请你给他写一封电子邮件。

内容包括：1.节日的意义

2.节日持续的时间

3.节前，除夕，节日期间人们的主要活动。

M3为了让学生们了解不同领域的一些英雄人物，学习他们的宝贵精神，你校开展了以My hero为题的英语演讲比赛。请根据以下提示写一篇演讲稿。

内容包括：1.英雄人物的生平

2.英雄人物的贡献

3.你的感想。

范例一 刘伟，无臂钢琴演奏者。他十岁时在一次意外中失去双臂，但他并没有放弃成为一名钢琴家的梦想。经过用脚刻苦练习弹琴，他最终在《中国达人秀》的舞台中实现了自己的梦想。请根据以上内容写一篇英语短文。要求：1.简要描述刘伟的经历 2.谈谈从他的经历中你得到的启示。 范例二

每个人心中都有英雄。请根据下列信息介绍一下中国的“两弹元勋” （The hero of two bombs）邓稼先。要求书写工整，卷面整洁，80词左右，可适当发挥。

1.伟大的科学家, 研究(research)和发展了中国的核武器(nuclear weapon).

2.1924年生于安徽。1941-1945在西南联合大学（Southwest United University）学习，1948年到美国留学。

3.1950年回中国，开始研究原子核理论(nuclear theory )。60年代，造出原子弹(A-bomb)和氢弹(super bomb)。

4.1987年死于直肠癌(rectal cancer)。

范例三

现在许多人都拥有了QQ号，但你知道它的发明者是谁吗？请根据以下提示写一篇80词左右的短文，介绍它的发明者马化腾。 提示：

1、马化腾，男，1971年出生于广东；

2、学习努力，1993年毕业于深圳大学(Shenzhen University)

3、毕业后在深圳一家公司担任(work as)程序员（Programmer）,五年后自己开了一家公司（company）， 经过努力，发明了QQ；

4、无论干什么，都不放弃。他是我们心中的英雄，我们要向他学习。

天下最伟大的爱就是母爱。假设你是李静，母亲节就要到了，你们班将举办以What will you do for Mum?为题的英语演讲比赛。请你准备一篇80词左右的演讲稿参加比赛。

M 1

The Eiffel Tower is very famous around the world.It is in Paris, the capital of France.It got its name from its designer Gustave Eiffel.The building of the tower began in 1887 and it took two years.The Eiffel Tower has three floors.On the first and second floors, there are dining rooms.And you can have a great view of Paris on the viewing platform of the third floor.A great number of tourists come to visit the Eiffel Tower every year.It is the symbol of French culture.

M2

Dear Jim,, How are you? I’m really glad that you are interested in the Spring Festival.I’d like to introduce it to you.The Spring Festival is the most important traditional festival in China.It usually lasts for 15 days.

Before the Festival, people usually clean their houses.They think it can sweep away bad luck.On the eve of the festival, family members get together and have a big meal.As they eat, they watch the Spring Festival Gala on TV.At midnight, they set off fireworks to welcome the New Year.During the festival, people visti the relatives and friends.They wish each other a happy year and good luck.Best wishes! Yours, Wang Bo M3 范例一

Liu Wei, an armle piano player, has a very special experience.He lost his arms in an accdent when he was 10, but he didn’t give up his dream of being a pianist.He tried to pracitse playing the piano with his feet.Finally he realised his dream in “China’s Got Talent”.

As a student, I’ve learnt a lot from his story.We may meet a lot of difficulties in our future life, but we should believe that our dream will come true by working hard.No matter how hard life is, we won’t fail unle we give up our hope.

Hello, cla.I’m Li Jing.Mother’s Day is coming.I’m going to do something for my mum on that day.My mum likes flowers, so I’ll buy some beautiful ones for her.I’ll cook a delicious dinner after school.Our family will get together and have dinner happily.Also, I’ll send my mum a card and say “Happy Mother’s Day” to her.

I love my mum very much and I’ll study hard to make her proud of me one day.Thanks for your attention. M3 贝多芬, 著名作曲家(composer), 生于1770年德国波恩(Bonn), 1792年搬到奥地利(Austria)的维也纳(Vienna), 向约瑟夫·海顿学习作曲, 很快他就能自己谱曲。但是他成功后便失聪了, 但他仍旧坚持谱曲。

1827年, 在维也纳去世。

I like the famous composer Beethoven very much.Beethoven was born in Bonn, Germany, in 1770.In 1792, he moved to Vienna, Austria to study with Austrian composer Joseph Haydn.Soon Beethoven could play music that he wrote himself.But just as he was becoming succeful, he started to lose his hearing.But he kept writing music.The music he wrote became even better.In 1827, he died in Vienna.I was deeply moved by Beethoven himself and his music.

M4 某英文报社正就青少年与父母关系这一话题开展题为“How to keep a good relationship with parents”的征文活动。请你根据以下要点, 写一篇80个词左右的英语短文参加此次活动:

1.父母规矩太多, 过于强调学习成绩, 不理解自己等问题; 2.你对这些问题的看法;

3.你与父母保持良好关系的做法。

How to keep a good relationship with parents In my opinion, I have too many rules at home.My parents never allow me to go out with my friends at night.They don’t allow me to choose my own clothes, either.And they pay too much attention to my exam results.I think my parents don’t quite understand me.

However, I try my best to understand them.Although they don’t allow me to make my own decisions and give me too much preure, I know that it is because they really love me and want me to have a bright future.

In order to keep a good relationship with my parents, I study hard, listen to them, talk to them as friends, tell them my troubles, and help them do more housework.

M5 假如你陪你的外籍老师去某音乐厅, 在门口的布告栏上看见一张观众须知, 内容如下:

1.一人一票, 凭票入场。

2.场内严禁吸烟。3.食品和饮料请勿带进场内。4.演出时请勿照相。5.演出时请勿使用电话。6.提前30分钟入场。

史密斯先生不懂中文, 他很想知道布告栏上写的是什么。现在, 请你把观众须知的内容用英文告诉史密斯先生, 并把要讲的话写下来。

Mr Smith, it is a notice to the audience.It says that we should enter the concert hall 30 minutes earlier before the concert starts.Entrance to the hall is by ticket only, each one each ticket.As a rule, food or drinks should not be taken into the hall.Of course, smoking is not allowed in the hall, either.Please don’t take your digital camera with you because no photos can be taken during the concert.And what is more, mobile phones must be kept off during the concert.

M6.上周学校举行了初三年级家长会, 家长、学生和老师进行了面对面的交流, Betty代表同学们说出了困惑, 表达了决心:

1.因为经常考试, 她时常有些压力, 有时感到心烦意乱; 2.作业多, 没有时间; 不知如何平衡学习与自己的业余爱好; 3.老师告诉她放松的方法有很多: (1)多与父母或朋友交流(2)……

4.现在她知道了时间的重要性, 能按时交作业, 已经取得了很大的进步。

Last week our school held a parents’meeting.Parents, students and teachers sat together and talked a lot.Betty says she has a lot of problems.She often suffers from stre and feels disturbed at times because of exams.She has too much homework, so she doesn’t have time for her hobbies.She also doesn’t know how to keep a balance between work and hobbies.Her teacher often tells her there are many ways to relax.She can often talk to her parents and friends.She can also read some great books by famous writers.Now she knows it’s important to save time.She can hand in her homework on time.She has made great progre in study.

M7.请以“My Favourite Great Book”为题, 根据下面的问题写一篇80个词左右的短文, 注意适当表达自己的看法。

1.Who is the writer of the great book? 2.What is the main idea of the book? 3.Who are the important characters? 4.What’s the title of the story?

My Favourite Great Book

My favourite great book is The Adventures of Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain.Tom Sawyer is a lively and clever boy.He lives with his aunt Polly.His aunt is strict with him, so he runs to an island in the middle of the Miiippi River with two friends, Huck and Joe.With Huck, he goes looking for treasure; with Becky, he gets lost in a cave.And finally Tom and Huck find a box of gold.Tom is the hero of the story, but there are other important characters.Becky is pretty with fair hair.Huck is Tom’s best friend, and Injun Joe is the bad man of the story.

The theme of the story is to do with children growing up and becoming more serious.

推荐第10篇：外研九年级上册各模块英语作文

外研九年级上册各模块英语作文范文

Module 1

（一）假如你是王红，你的朋友马丽将来你这里度假，请你给她介绍一下你市北海滩的情况。Dear Ma LI, I’m very glad to hear that you will travel to my city.Now let me tell you something about my city.My city is famous for Beihai Beach.The Beihai Beach is in the north of my city, about 8 kilometres away.It’s one of the best beaches in our city.The sand is fine, soft and clean.The water is clear with small waves.It’s suitable for swimming and playing beach volleyball.Many people come here to spend their holidays.Everyone says it’s a beautifully place to travel.The people here are very friendly.I think you will have a good time here.I’m looking forward to your coming.

Yours, Wang Hong

（二）在假期中，几乎每个人都参观过自己喜欢的地方。现在请你以导游的身份，向你的游客介绍一下他们即将参观的城市。

提示：1.下一站到哪个城市参观； 2.那个城市的自然景观； 3.有哪些地方值得浏览。 Ladies and gentlemen, I’m your guide today.We are going to visit Guilin.First, I’d like to tell you something about Guilin before we arrive.Guilin is in the north of Guangxi.The population of the city is six hundred thousand. Guilin is famous for its beautiful scenery in the world.The hills are green and the water is clear.The environment here is clean and tidy.Every year a lot of tourists come to visit it.You can see the scenes of the Li River by boat.You can also see the scenic spots in the city on free buses. I hope you will enjoy yourselves in Guilin.

Module 2

（一）假设你叫李岩，你的美国朋友Ted想向你了解一下中国人是如何庆祝中秋节的，请你给他写一封信介绍一下。要求70词左右，信的开头和结尾已给出，但不计入总词数。 提示词语：a harvest festival, enjoy the moonlight, eat moon cakes Dear Ted, How are you? You said that you wanted to know something about Mid-Autumn Festival.I am very glad to tell you something about it.Mid-Autumn Festival is a harvest festival.Farmers begin to harvest fruit and vegetables.It is a big time for families and friends to get together.On that evening, the moon looks brighter and rounder.Many families sit around a table and enjoy the beautiful moonlight.We always have a big dinner.We also eat moon cakes and fruit.I hope you can come and celebrate Mid-Autumn Festival with us next year.Best wishes to you! Yours, Li Yan

（二）假如你是李磊，你的美国朋友Tom对各个国家的节日文化很感兴趣。请用英语给他介绍一个中国传统节日。

Dear Tom, I’m glad to tell you something about Chinese Spring Festival.The Spring Festival is very important in my country.It usually come in January or February. It’s time to say goodbye to the old year and welcome the new.We usually clean and decorate our

I house carefully before it comes.As soon as the Spring Festival comes, we put on chunlian on the door and chuanghua on the window.It means the start of the celebration. We celebrate the Spring Festival by eating a traditional dinner in the evening before the Spring Festival.There’s so much delicious food.We eat jiaozi— a kind of dumpling.After the dinner, we usually watch a special programme on TV. We always visit the relatives and friends and say “Happy New Year” to each other.When kids greet their grandparents, they can get lucky money.The celebration lasts until Yuan Xiaojie comes.Yours, Li Lei

Module 3

（一）成龙是国内外著名的电影演员，他出演的很多电影都深受人们的喜爱。请以My Favourite Hero为题介绍成龙的文章。 My Favourite Hero Jackie Chan is my favourite hero.He is one of the most famous film stars in China and in the world. Jackie Chan was born in Hong Kong in 1954.His family was poor when he was young.He studied in a drama school in Hong Kong for ten years.Later, he became an actor.He makes action films more interesting and makes the world pay more attention to Chinese film today.He also likes to help others and he has helped lots of poor the sick people in the world.He loves life and he is a hard-working man.His films make him a hero. I think he is one of the most succeful men in the world.

（二）刘伟，无臂(armle)钢琴演奏者。他十岁时在一次意外事故中失去双臂，但他并没有放弃成为一名钢琴家的梦想。经过刻苦用脚练习弹琴，他最终在“中国达人秀”(China’s Got Talent)的舞台上实现了自己的梦想。请根据以上内容写篇英语短文。

（三）要求：1.简要描述刘伟的经历。2.谈谈从他的经历中你得到的启示。

Liu Wei, an armle piano player, has a very special experience.He lost his arms in an accident when he was 10, but he didn’t give up his dream of being a pianist.He tried to practice playing the piano with his feet.Finally he realized his dream in “China Got Talent”. As a student, I’ve learnt a lot from his story.We may meet a lot of difficulties in our future life, but we should believe that our dream will come true by working hard.No matter how hard life is, we won’t fail unle we give up our hope.

Module 4

一、某英文报社正就青少年与父母关系这一话题开展题为“How to Keep Good Relationship with Parents”的征文活动。请你根据以下要点，写一篇80词左右的英语短文参加此次活动；

要点提示：1.父母规矩太多，过于强调学习成绩、不理解自己等问题。2.你对这些问题的看法。 3.你与父母保持良好关系的做法。

How to Keep Good Relationship with Parents In my opinion, I have too many rules at home.My parents never allow me to go out with my friends at nights.They don’t allow me to choose my own clothes, either.And they pay too much attention to my exam results.I don’t think my parents quite understand me.However, I try my best to understand them.Although they don’t allow me to make my own decisions and give me too much preure, I know that it is because they really love me and want me to have a bright future.In order to keep good relationship with my parents, I study hard, listen to them, talk to them as friends, tell them my troubles , and help them do more housework.

二、暑假就要到了，你和你的同学们正在讨论暑假计划，你也提出了自己的打算。请你根据以下提示内容以My Summer Holiday为题，介绍你暑假打算怎么过。

II 提示：1.坚持锻炼身体；2.根据个人兴趣和需要安排学习； 3.帮助家人做家务。 要求：暑假生活除必须写以上3项内容外，其他活动（1-2项）可适当发挥。

My Summer Holiday The summer holiday is coming at once.During the holiday, the first thing I’ll do is to get relaxed after the exams.I’ll go on doing morning exercises every day.In the afternoon I’ll go fishing if I’m free.I like playing the computer so much that I’m going to surf the Internet and try to find some useful information.I’d like to spend some time reading books because I like reading .Because my Chinese is a little weak, I’m going to read more books on Chinese than on any other subject.On the other hand I’ll help my parents do some housework as much as poible.I’d like to visit some of my friends and relatives as well. I’m sure I will have a good time this summer.

Module5

一．你家附近有个大图书馆，馆内有许多书，请你将这个图书馆的要求介绍给你的同学，以便他们去那儿看书时能遵守这些规定。

规定：1.不要把包带进图书馆 ； 2.看书时保持安静,不要大声喧哗，到处跑动。 3.馆内禁止吸烟； 4.每次可借四本书；不能将书转借给别人；按时还书； 5.下午六点前离开图书馆，图书馆六点关门。 There is a big library near my home.It is very good and I often go there to do some reading.There are all kinds of books in it.When you read in the library, you should follow these rules: Don’t take your bags into the library.You must keep quiet while you are reading.There is no shouting or running around in it.You mustn’t smoke in the library.You can borrow four boobs at a time, but you mustn’t lend them to others.Remember to return the books on time.You’d better leave the library before 6:00 pm, because it closes at 6:00 pm. Follow the rules and you’ll enjoy yourself in it.

Module 6

一、The Way to Keep Healthy Health has become a very important part of our life.There are many ways to keep healthy.First, you can eat more fruits and vegetables, and you’d better drink more warm water.Next, you have to do lots of exercise, and have at least 8 hours’ sleep every night.Remember not to drink coffee or tea before before you go to bed.Don’t eat too much sugar and don’t work or study too late because it will make you very tired.If you care about yourself, it’s easy to have a healthy lifestyle.

二、成长中每个人都要面对烦恼，并解决问题。假设你叫刘明，是美国中学生生艾丽斯的朋友，你收到了她的电子邮件，请给她回复，回答她的问题，提出你的建议，并就此事谈谈你的看法。

邮件内容包括： 1.你是否遇到过这样的问题； 2.该借给她钱还是不借给她钱； 3.若她忘记归还该怎么办。 注意：1.恰当运用条件状语从句，句子结构要完整； 2.词数：80左右。 Dear Liu Ming, Hi! I’m so sad.Angela is a close friend of mine.This morning she wanted to borrow some money from me.If I lend her the money, I’m afraid she won’t pay me back.I don’t know what to do.Do you have the same problem? I need your help.I’m looking forward to hearing from you soon.Yours, Alice

Dear Alice, I’m glad to hear from you.Yes, I sometimes have the same problem.I think if she really needs the money, you’d better

III lend it to her.You don’t need to worry too much.She’ll probably pay you back when she has money.If you don’t lend her the money, I’m afraid you may lose the friend.If she really forgets about the money, you can remind her in a polite way.For example, you can ask her if the money helped her at that time.I think everyone may have trouble in life and we should help each other.So when my friends need money, I will try my best to help her.Maybe I’ll get it back, or maybe I won’t.I hope what I said can help you.Yours, Liu Ming

Module 7

一、目前中学生学习任务重、压力大。而广泛的阅读有利于开阔视野，调节身心。在课业学习和业余生活中，你喜欢阅读吗？你读名著吗？或许有些名著给你留下了深刻的印象，对你有一定的影响。请就这个话题谈一谈。 I love reading.I spend some time reading every day, though I have too much everyday homework.I especially enjoy reading some great works.I have read Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain, one of the greatest American writers.It describes people’s lives in the southern states of America at that time.It tells how young people grow.It influences me a lot.I learn how people love each other.By reading it , I also know how bad people pay for their actions .It is thought to be one of the greatest American stories.

二、My Favourite Newspaper Century Weekly is my favourite newspaper.It is an English newspaper.It is published in Beijing each week.There are plenty of beautiful pictures and interesting articles in it.I enjoy reading the paper.I read it to improve my English.I have learnt a lot of new words and useful expreions.Besides, I can get information about different things, from politics to sports and music.Century weekly is very popular with students and English learners.I really love it.Module 8

一、Let’s Do Exercise Together It’s very important for us to do exercise.Doing exercise can not only help us keep healthy, but also help to train a person’s character.What’s more, doing exercise helps us to study better.We can do exercise whenever we want.It is good for us to go to school on foot or by bike.In PE claes, we can do all kinds of exercise, such as running , jumping, playing basketball and so on.On weekends, we can climb mountains or go swimming with our friends.Also, we can go hiking during the vacations.Let’s do exercise and have a healthy lifestyle together!

二、My Favourite Player Fu Mingxia is a famous diver.She was born in 1978.When she was four years old, she started diving.Though she was young, she trained very hard and make great progre.At the age of 12, she won her first world diving champion.Fu Mingxia won her first Olympic gold medal at the Barcelona Olympic Games.In Barcelona, she became China’s youngest Olympic gold medalist when she was 14.Fu Mingxia had the best gift for her fourteenth birthday.She won the Olympic gold medal so she became famous all over the world.Module 9

一、the Computer One of the most important inventions if the computer.It has changed the world and people’s lives.The first computer was as large as a room.Today’s computers have become smaller and smaller.Computers are very useful.First, they can save large amounts of information in their memory chips.

IV Second, computers can work very fast, and they never get tired.Third, more and more machines are built with the help of computers.There are computer clarooms in many schools.Students learn a lot from computers.Students can learn a foreign language on computers.They can also make friends with others around the world on the computer.

二、根据下面提示内容，写一篇有关纸的发明历史的作文。

1.世界上原本没有纸，以前人们不得不在石头或布上写字；2.中国的蔡伦发明了纸； 3.今天，人们将蔡伦的方法加以改进，制造出了很多其他种类的纸，人们会记住这位发明者。

Many years ago, there was no paper in the world.People had to write on the stones and cloth.It was a waste of time.And it was really difficult.Then Chinese inventor Cai Lun invented paper.It was not only very convenient but also very useful.Today, people improve the paper that was invented by Cai Lun.And we make a lot of different kinds of paper.I think it is one of the most helpful inventions in the world.People in the world will forever remember this great inventor—Cai Lun.Module 10

一、暑假就要到了，假设你们学校的外籍教师Mi Green要到海南岛去度假，她向你（Zhang Ming）了解情况。请你为她写一段简要的介绍，内容包括： 1.海南岛的地理位置、自然条件； 2.告诉她海南岛度假的活动内容:钓鱼、潜水、冲浪、游览亚热带风光等； 3.提示她带上度假必备物品：太阳镜、伞、太阳帽等。 Dear Mi Green, A trip to Hainan is the best choice for your summer holiday.Hainan lies in the south of China.Everything is quite different from here in Guangxi.The weather there is often changeable, sunny or rainy.No matter what weather it is, it’s very hot there.You can go fishing, swimming, diving surfing every day.If you want to relax yourself quietly, you can stay on the beach.The beach is very beautiful. I hope what I have written will be helpful to you.Enjoy yourself.Zhang Ming Module 11

My Favourite Phote Hello, everyone! This is my favourite photo.It was taken when I first took part in school table tennis competition.In the picture, I’m getting ready to play.I look very careful.To tell the truth, I liked playing table tennis, but I was afraid to play in the competition.My friends encouraged me to have a try.At last, I agreed.I practiced so hard for the competition that I won the first prize in the end.From the experience I learn that nothing is impoible if you put your heart into it.Module 12

一、许多野生动物处于濒临灭绝的危险境地，特别是许多大型动物，出于乱砍滥伐，环境的破坏，使它们的灭绝速度加快。地球是不能没有动植物，人类出为能独存，因此，我们要保护环境，采取措施改变人类的生存状况。

请你以Protect Wild Animals为题，写一篇短文。谈谈我们为什么要保护野生动物，应该采取措施保护野生动物。

Protect Wild Animals Why should we protect wild animals? Do you know any of endangered animals? Why are they in danger? I think there are many endangered animals in the world, such as tigers and pandas.When farmers cut down trees, tigers can’t hide or hunt.Many tigers are killed by people who want to sell their fur for money.And there are few places where pandas can live. We human beings could not live without all the plants and animals around us.So Protecting wild

V animals is very important.We must take measures to keep plants from being destroyed and stop animals from being killed.If each of us can plant a tree and build a birdhouse, the world will be more beautiful. VI

第11篇：九年级外研版下册英语课文原文

九年级外研版下册英语课文原文 Module 1 Unit 1 Listen and read.Lingling: Welcome back, everyone! Betty: Hi Lingling! How was your holiday? Not bad! I went to Henan Province.But the trip back was very long.The Lingling: train was full of people, and I had to stand for over six hours.Betty: Bad luck.Where\'s Tony? He\'s staying with his family in the UK, and flying back tomorrow.The Daming: flights were late today.Betty: Why is travel so difficult in winter? Well, it\'s the busiest season in China because of Spring Festival.Where did Lingling: you go, Daming? We flew to Hong Kong—and the flight was late! But we took the boat to Daming: Landau Island and went to Disneyland.Lingling: How about you, Betty? We had quite a good time in Beijing.We went sightseeing by bus and by taxi.And last weekend, we took a tour by coach to the Summer Palace and Betty: went for a long walk.And now, better get back to work ...We\'ve got exams at the end of the Daming: term.Betty: Yes, but there are plenty of fun things to do this term ...the school trip ...Lingling: ...and the school leavers\' party ...Daming: ...the visit to the English-speaking theatre in Beijing ...Lingling: And our trip to Los Angeles! We\'ll have a great time!

Module 1 Unit 2 Look at the phrases from the paage.What do you think the paage will be about?

%

a.1 ...his first long trip by train ... b.2 ...leaving his village and his home ... c.4 ...sitting in Lin\'s seat.

d.6 Slowly the young man stood up ... e.5 This young man has the right ticket ... f.3 With tears in his eyes ...Read the paage and number the phrases in the order they happen.Excuse Me.You\'re Sitting in My Seat! capital.Now it was in front of him, to set off soon.He looked at his brother.\"Don\'t forget where you come from, little brother,\" Jin said.\"And watch your bags carefully.\" Lin nodded, unable to speak.This was his first long trip by train at the start of his new life, leaving his village and his home for the last 16 years.He held Jin in his arms.With tears in his eyes, Jin pushed Lin away.\"Go, brother.Write to us as soon as you get there, OK?\" Lin jumped onto the train.There were people and bags everywhere.He pushed past them towards his seat.A young man was sitting in Lin\'s seat.He was wearing jeans and a very smart jacket, and was smoking a cigarette.What should he do? Six pairs of eyes looked at Lin, while the man looked out of the window.\"Sir, you\'re sitting in my seat,\" Lin said, with a nervous smile.The other people watched with interest.The man didn\'t turn to look at Lin, but just looked out of the window.\"Excuse me.I have a ticket with the number of the seat you\'re sitting in!\" Lin said in a stronger voice.\"I also have a ticket with that number—though it is in another car.Besides, I was here first,\" said the man, without moving his head.Though he was sitting, he looked very tall and strong.Lin looked at the other paengers for help.\"But ...\" he started to say.\"But what?\" The man turned and looked at Lin.\"I\'m not moving.\" Finally a man wearing glaes spoke in a loud voice.\"This young man has the right ticket for that seat.You should move.\" Lin felt brave.\"See? Please move.I\'ve got a long way to go.\" \"How long?\" the young man asked.\"To the last stop, Beijing.\" \"I\'m getting off before you.Then you can have my seat.\" \"Where is that?\" asked Lin.\"Hangzhou.\" Lin thought Hangzhou was far away.\"It\'s seven hours away from here,\" the man with glaes said.\"Even if it\'s only 10 minutes, you should move.\" Slowly the young man stood up, dropped his cigarette on the floor, and disappeared down the train.

Module 2 Unit 1 Listen and read.Betty: Hey, Tony! How was the UK? Tony: Gue what! I saw Sally in London.Lingling: My pen friend Sally? Tony: Yes, Sally, the girl who visited us last year and played in the orchestra.Lingling: Oh, that\'s fantastic! How is she? Tony: She\'s fine.It was great to see her again.I really like her.Did you do anything interesting while you were there? Did you visit her Betty: school? Tony: Yes, I did.She took me there herself.Betty: What\'s it like? Tony: Here you are! These are some photos of Park School.I took them myself.Lingling: Let\'s have a look.Tony: It isn\'t as big as ours.It\'s only got about 700 pupils.Lingling: And how many pupils are there in a cla? Tony: Thirty.Lingling: Wow! Most claes have got a computer and Internet.And there are a few science laboratories, and a large library.And there\'s a swimming pool and Tony: a huge sports ground.Lingling: But Sally likes music.Tony: Well, there\'s a music room, too.And they have a hall for concerts.Lingling: Which school is better, our school or Park School? Both schools are very nice.And neither school has anything the other Tony: hasn\'t got.But ...Betty: But what ...? Tony: ...but I prefer our school! Daming: I bet we\'re even better than Park School at English! Lingling: Well, anyway, we\'re all going to get top grades for English!

Module 2 Unit 2 Read the paage and write a short title for each photo.

My School Life was 11.If I pa my exams next year, I\'ll stay here until I\'m 18.Park School is a secondary school, about 20 minutes by bike away from home.Before I came here, I went to primary school, near my home.I started primary school when I was five and stayed there for six years.The schoolday is from 8:45 a.m.to 3:15 p.m.We spend the first 10 minutes in our claroom while our teacher checks which pupils are present or absent.Then everyone goes to the main hall.There our head teacher makes a speech and tells us any news about the school.Leons begin at 9:05 and last for an hour.We have a break at 11:05 until 11:20, then another leon, then lunch for an hour.We have two more leons before school finishes.This year I have 11 subjects: maths, biology, chemistry, French, history, geography, music and IT, PHSE, ADT and PE (these stand for Information Technology; Personal Health and Safety Education; Art, Design and Technology and Physical Education).Fortunately, we don\'t have exams in every subject.PHSE is about the dangers of drugs and smoking, among other things.In ADT we also do things like learning to cook as well as drawing and design.Some people can do Italian and Spanish instead of French, but no one is learning Chinese ...yet! PE involves physical exercise, basketball, training in the gym and swimming—we\'re really lucky to have a swimming pool.I took exams when I was 7, 10, and 14 years old.Next year I take my exams in eight subjects, and then I can do between three and five subjects for the exams in my final year.We have a large sports ground where we play football, tennis and do athletics both during and after school hours.After-school activities, such as sports clubs and language societies are popular, too.During the school year there are usually visits to museums and galleries, and to camps for activities, such as climbing and cycling in the country.There are parties and discos and a sports day, and the school play is a really important event.Once a term, there is a parents\' meeting, so our parents and teachers can talk about our progre.What\'s the best thing about school? English, history, music ...and my friends.What\'s the worst thing? Homework ...and exams!

Module 3 Unit 1 Listen and read.Betty\'s mum: It\'s getting late, Betty.Nearly finished! I\'m doing a composition: Is life today better or worse than Betty: it was 50 years ago? Betty\'s mum: And what do you think? I think it\'s better.The most important difference is that people are Betty: healthier today, and they live longer than they did in the past.That\'s true.The advantage is that we know more about medicine today.Betty\'s We\'re better at preventing illne.But people don\'t eat as well as in the mum: past, and don\'t take as much exercise as they did.Betty: I suppose that\'s because public transport is much better today.Yes, I agree.People walk or use their bikes le, and they\'re lazier.Faster Betty\'s transport also makes more pollution.And that makes life more dangerous mum: and le healthy.What about work? People don\'t have to work as hard as they worked 50 Betty: years ago.Betty\'s Yes, but no one ever says they have too much free time! I also think mum: schoolchildren today work harder than we ever did.Betty: Yes, but I really want to do my best.Betty\'s mum: Why don\'t you ask Mrs Li downstairs? She\'s seen how life has changed.That\'s a good idea.Talking of free time, don\'t forget I\'m going on the Betty: school trip next month, and the theatre visit.Betty\'s mum: Good! You\'ll be more relaxed and le nervous before your exams.

Module 3 Unit 2 Read this sentence from the paage.It\'s an example of a main point.My parents, my sister and three brothers lived in a small house beside Example: a restaurant.Main point: Families were bigger in the past..Now choose the correct main point for these examples from the paage.1.My sister ...left school when she was only 12 ... My sister no longer wanted to go to school. The school leaving age was lower in the past.(T) 2.Looking after us was a full-time job, so she stayed at home. Married women were too busy at home to continue working.(T) It wasn\'t neceary for the mother to work.3....my mother never bought ready-made food as people do today. There wasn\'t any fast food in the past. The food we eat today isn\'t as healthy as it was.(T) 4.My parents liked him, and thought he came from a good family ... People from good families were always kind. Parents usually decided who their children married.(T) 5.Yes, there are lots more buildings and so much more traffic! Cars are cheaper today. There was le traffic in the past.(T)

Module 4 Unit 1 Listen and read.Lingling: I\'m really looking forward to the Shakespeare play.Betty: Me too! And the school trip to the Great Wall.Lingling: Yes, but I need a thick jacket, and some warm gloves and socks.Betty: In May? Lingling: I get really cold.Betty: OK.Let\'s go shopping! How about that new shopping centre in Wangfujing? You know, turn Lingling: left and go along Wangfujing, and it\'s on the right.Sure.We\'ll go by bus, OK? And have you decided what to wear to the Betty: school leavers\' party? Lingling: I\'ve got a really nice long dre.What about you? I\'ll probably wear a dre, too, but I need some shoes.OK, I\'ll meet Betty: you in front of school at two o\'clock this afternoon.(Later.) Betty: How about this jacket? Lingling: It\'s the right size but it\'s a bit bright.Betty: Let\'s see if they have one in blue.Where\'s the shop aistant? Lingling: It\'s that girl with long hair over there.Excuse me! Shop aistant: Can I help you? Betty: Yes, do you have this jacket in blue? Shop No, I don\'t think so.But we\'ve got some overcoats over here.Come aistant: this way.Betty: No, she doesn\'t want an overcoat.Lingling: Hey, I really like these shoes! Betty: Oh, take a look at that amazing skirt! Lingling: I think we\'re going to be here for some time.

Module 4 Unit 2 Read the paage and find out what the words and expreions mean.big name; designer clothes; logo; look cool

Looking Cool

when you go shopping for clothes? Do you choose 1.something fashionable ...or comfortable? Do you like to look different? Or do you wear the same clothes as your friends? Do you go for this year\'s colours? Is it the logo—the company symbol—that catches your attention? Or maybe film stars are wearing these clothes? What helps you choose the clothes you like? Everyone spends money on clothes, and everyone has their personal look.The best-known clothing companies sell their \"designer\" clothes all over the world.But the number of these big name companies is in fact very small, and the clothes they make are more expensive than the clothes made by le 2.well-known companies.Many people even prefer them to cheaper clothes.Why? Many young people today care about the way they look.They often buy \"designer\" clothes because they think they look cool.Then the le well-known companies make clothes which look the same.But they don\'t sell as well 3.because they don\'t have the logo.People also think designer clothes are better made.For example, many people think the right running shoes will make you run faster or play better.Of course, this is not always true.It\'s the training—not the trainers—that improves your speed or your score.But that\'s not the point.People believe that it\'s true ...4.and then buy the shoes.The big companies only want to make a lot of money.Above all, designer clothes are more popular because of clever advertising.All of the international companies spend millions of dollars every year to make 5.us buy their clothes.And they succeed! Most people dre in a way that shows off their personality.But if some of us buy expensive clothes just to look cool, what does that say about us? Maybe it\'s 6.just clever advertising.So next weekend, think about the clothes you put on.What\'s the logo on your trainers? Who made your jeans? And how many of your friends wear the same clothes as you do? And then think that maybe some of us could spend our 7.money better.

Module 5 Unit 1 Listen and read.Mr OK, listen up! Before we can enjoy ourselves on the Great Wall, there are Jackson: a few rules and suggestions.OK? All: Yes, Mr Jackson.Mr First, you must keep to the path.You mustn\'t walk along the edge Jackson: because you might fall and hurt yourself.Is that clear? All: Yes.Mr And you have to keep together.You mustn\'t go off on your own, because Jackson: you might get lost.All: No, Mr Jackson.Daming: Can we have something to eat now? I\'m starving! No, you can\'t, Daming! You only had breakfast an hour ago.I think we Mr should start walking, and then stop at noon for our picnic.But you Jackson: shouldn\'t drink all the water, because you may need some later.Betty: Can we go rock climbing? Mr Yes, you can, but you must use ropes.You have to think about personal Jackson: safety! And you must have the right shoes.OK, I think that\'s all.Let\'s go down this path, and then we can cro the stream and climb up to the top of that mountain.Then we can take a look acro the countryside ...Daming: ...and have lunch? Mr ...and then walk along that part of the wall, up there.Come on! I\'ll lead Jackson: the way.Daming: I feel tired already.I may need a rest very soon.

Module 5 Unit 2 Look at the picture and answer the questions.

1.What do you think the bear is doing? 2.What do you think the people in the tent should do?

%

Read the paage and answer the questions.1.What were the three people doing in Yellowstone Park? 2.How much do they know about bears?

3.Where do you think is the best place to keep food safe from bears? 4.What was the noise behind the writer?

5.Do you think their stay in the park was a succe?

Watch Out! Bears About! hours.We soon fell asleep.In the middle of the night, there was a strange noise outside.But when I looked out of the tent, there was nothing to see.In the morning, I got up to make breakfast.The bag of food was open.\"Bears,\" said Joe.\"We should hang the food in a tree tonight.\" Later that day we stopped in a beautiful valley by a stream.It was very peaceful, and we fell asleep listening to the sound of water.During the night the bears came back.This time they took the food from the tree.\"How did they do that?\" I asked.\"Not high enough.Bears can climb trees.They can smell food from a distance.We should pick up the rubbish, too.\" The first rule of camping is to keep a clean camp site.You can\'t leave anything which bears might think is food.\"OK, let\'s tidy the site up, and move on.Oh, and we should make lots of noise, too.If they know where we are, they may not come any closer,\" said Joe.\"If you see a bear,\" said Joe, \"you mustn\'t move or make any gesture.And above all, you mustn\'t run.No one can run faster in the forest than a bear.\" We went to sleep ...or we tried to.The next day we stopped at midday for something to eat, and while the others were resting, I went for a walk in the forest.Suddenly, I saw a baby bear playing with some sticks and stones.He looked so friendly, and I remember thinking, \"If I reach out, I can just touch him.\" There was a loud noise behind me.I stood very still.I didn\'t even turn my head.There was another loud noise, and I still couldn\'t see what was happening.The baby bear looked up, and ran past me into the woods.I stayed in the same position for five minutes, maybe more.Then slowly I turned round, and on the hillside about 300 metres away I saw the baby bear and his huge mother.I have never run so fast, back to my friends.For the next 10 days, every time there was a sudden noise, my blood went cold.

Module 6 Unit 1

Listen and answer the questions.Use the words in the box to help you.accident; ache; blood; fever; flu; ground; knee; shoulder; stomach; wound

1.Has Tony\'s dad ever had serious accidents? 2.What parts of his body did he hurt? 3.How long did it take him to get better? 4.What illne does he sometimes get? 5.What does he get with this illne?

6.What does he think Tony will get, and why? 7.Listen and read.Betty: Hey! My legs are aching.How far have we walked? Mr About 10 kilometres.Let\'s wait for the others.They\'ll catch up in a few Jackson: minutes.Lingling: Who\'s miing? Betty: Tony and Daming.What\'s happened to them? Lingling: They were walking more slowly than us.Mr And look at those clouds! I think it\'s going to rain.I\'ll go back and look for Jackson: them.Betty: Wait a minute! I can hear someone.Tony: Help! Lingling: It\'s Tony.Where have you been? It\'s Daming.He has had an accident.He was running along the wall when he tripped and fell over the edge.He\'s cut his head; his shoulder hurts Tony: and I think he\'s broken his leg.Mr Jackson: When did he fall? Tony: About 10 minutes ago.Mr OK, show me where he is.I\'ll call for help on my mobile.Jackson: (Later) Tony: There he is, lying on the ground! Mr Jackson: Hi, Daming.How do you feel? Daming: My leg hurts, and I feel a bit cold.Tony: And you\'ve cut your knee.There\'s blood on your leg.Mr Jackson: Can you move your foot? Daming: Yes.Ouch! But I can\'t walk.Mr Jackson: We had better get you to hospital.Lingling: Will he live? Mr Of course he will! He\'s got a wound in his leg and he may get a fever but Jackson: it\'s nothing serious.He\'ll soon be OK!

Module 6 Unit 2 Look at the pictures.Say what the advantages or dangers are.Picture 1 Picture 2 Picture 3

Read the paage.Which paragraphs describe what you can see in the pictures? Six Rules for a Safe and Healthy Life improvements in both health care and personal safety, most people are living healthier, longer lives.Someone who is born today can expect to live 25 years longer than someone who was born in the 19th century.It\'s even thought that in the future more and more people will celebrate their hundredth birthday.Here are six rules for a healthy life.1.Be careful! It\'s dangerous out there! We all know that we shouldn\'t run acro the road in front of the oncoming traffic, or cycle too close to cars.But we\'re not sure about how to stay safe in the countryside.When you\'re out walking, you should always go with someone, and tell your parents where you\'re planning to go.Remember! Climbing may also mean falling—what goes up must come down.Safety rules and advice are there to help you, not to make life le fun.2.Don\'t be a couch potato! Sure, it\'s comfortable to sit on the couch and watch.But experts say you should walk at least 10,000 steps every day to keep fit.In the past, people\'s jobs required more physical effort.When farmers were working in the fields, they were keeping fit at the same time.Think about it: do you get the same amount of exercise today as they did in the past? 3.Watch your diet! It\'s important to eat plenty of the right things, above all, fruit, vegetables, and to see fast food or sweets as something very special—maybe just now and then.The wrong diet means you\'ll put on weight, one of the fastest ways to an unhealthy life.4.Rest up while you can! When we were babies, we slept for much of the day—if our parents were lucky! Teenagers don\'t need as much sleep but it\'s important to get about eight hours\' sleep.At weekends, you\'ve got more time, so use it not just for your friends, but for rest, too.5.Don\'t worry.Be happy! Many doctors believe that happine is important for our general health.If you\'re worried about something, talk to your parents or your teacher.6.Say no ...to smoking and drugs! Yes, you knew I was going to say this! But it\'s so important.More teenagers damage their health through smoking and taking drugs than any other dangers.Think about the effect on your family and friends, and think about its effect on you and your health.Happy living!

Module 7 Unit 1

Look at the party invitation and answer the questions.

Invitation You\'re invited to the School Leavers\' Party on Saturday 30th May at 5 p.m.

in the school hall

Bring a traditional dish—\"finger food\"

Music and dancing 1.What\'s a school leavers\' party? 2.What\'s a traditional dish?

3.What do you think \"finger food\" is? 4.What else is there to do at the party? 5.Listen and read.Lingling: When\'s the school leavers\' party? After the visit to the play by Shakespeare.It\'ll be held on 30th May.We\'re Betty: all invited.Daming: In fact, I\'ve been chosen to look after the dance music.Tony: And I have been asked to decorate the hall.And everyone has been told to prepare a traditional dish from our own Betty: countries.Will we be allowed to cook it at school, or must it be made at home, and Lingling: brought here? I suppose it can be heated up in the school kitchen, but it should be cooked Betty: at home.What are you going to make? Lingling: Suanla tang, I gue.Betty: What\'s that? Lingling: Hot and sour soup.It\'s made with chicken or pork and vegetables.But the invitation says finger food! That means you have to eat it with your Betty: fingers.Lingling: Oh, soup\'s no good, then.You need a spoon.What about you? Betty: Hamburgers, with cheese in a bread roll.Tony: And you, Daming? Daming: Jiaozi! The best jiaozi in China are made by my grandmother! Betty: Is she invited to the school leavers\' party, too? Daming: Hm, I see what you mean.What about you, Tony? Tony: A traditional English pizza with cheese, tomato and ham.Betty: Pizza isn\'t English! It was invented in Italy, not England! Tony: But pizza can be eaten everywhere in England.Betty: I don\'t think Shakespeare ate pizza!

Module 7 Unit 2 Read the paage.What are the most surprising pieces of information about meals and eating customs in the West?

Do as the Romans Do saying, \"When in Rome, do as the Romans do.\" And when you eat Western food, do as the Westerners do.Here are some things you may wish to know about eating together in the West.In the West, lunch is eaten later, always after midday, sometimes at one o\'clock.Dinner is served around 7 p.m.or even later.In Spain it\'s usual to eat lunch at 2 p.m.and dinner at 10 p.m.! At the start of a meal the Chinese usually say \"manman chi\".The French say \"Bon appetit\", and the Italians say \"Buon appetito\".But there\'s no similar expreion in English! \"Enjoy your meal\" is usually only said by a waiter.For \"ganbei\", you can say \"Cheers\"! Chopsticks are only used when people eat Chinese food.Knives and forks are used for most food.The fork is held in your left hand and the knife in your right, and the food is held with the fork and cut with the knife.Americans often cut all their food first, and then put the fork in their right hand to eat it.Soup is drunk with a spoon.However, there is some food which can be eaten with your fingers, such as chicken legs, seafood, bread and cake.At the start of a meal, if you\'re the guest, you\'ll be invited to serve yourself (\"Help yourself!\"), or your plate will be filled by your host (\"Can I serve you?\").If you\'ve been given something you don\'t like, it should be pushed to the edge of the plate and left.You don\'t have to say why, but if you feel an explanation is required, just say, \"I\'m sorry.I can\'t eat this.\" No one will be cro.If you\'re offered more food, but can\'t eat any more, just say, \"No, thanks.It was delicious, but I\'ve had enough.\" Generally, fewer dishes are prepared than in China.It isn\'t thought to be so important to offer too much food.Finally, it\'s sometimes difficult to know when the meal is over.If you\'ve been invited to dinner by Western friends, you\'ll know that you\'re expected to stay and talk around the dinner table long after the last dish has been brought to the table, and it\'s thought quite rude if you leave as soon as you finish eating.The golden rule is: Watch the other people.Do as they do.

Module 8 Unit 1 Listen and read.Tony\'smum: How was the play? Tony: Well, I was pleased to see it, but three hours is a long time to stay still.Tony\'smum: Was it in English? Tony: Yes, it was acted by the Beijing English Theatre Company.Tony\'smum: What was the best bit? The fight between the two families and their servants! And the actors Tony: who played the roles of Romeo and Juliet were superb! But it\'s sad at the end, because Juliet loves Romeo, but her father has decided she must marry someone else.So they both decide to kill themselves.Tony\'smum: \"A pair of star-croed lovers take their life.\" Tony: OK, OK, I\'m impreed.Can you recite any more lines? Tony\'smum: No, that\'s all I can remember.Did you have a good seat? Well, it was hard to see the play at the back.The best place to sit is in Tony: the front row.Tony\'smum: Could you hear the dialogue? I gueed what they were saying, but their voices weren\'t very loud.Tony: Daming and Lingling found their accents really difficult to understand.Tony\'smum: The best way is to read the play before you see it.Tony: We tried to do that, but there wasn\'t time.Tony\'s mum: Did you have anything to eat before you went to the theatre? Tony: No such luck! I was starving!

Module 8 Unit 2 Look at the photo and say what type of entertainment or sport you can see.

 basketball  jazz  movies  ...Think of other words which you can use to talk about the photo. basketball: match, stadium  jazz: concert, band  movies: ... Read the paage.Which paragraph describes what you can see in the photo?



The City that Never Sleeps   New York, New York, it\'s a wonderful town! The Bronx is up and the Battery\'s down!



(On the Town, by Leonard Bernstein)  New York is probably the entertainment capital of the world, and a great place to see the big names and top stars in films, television, theatre and music.Sports fans have plenty of chances to watch some great sport, and the New York nightlife is world-famous. Madison Square Garden is the place to watch the New York Knicks Basketball Team and the Golden Gloves boxing competition.To watch baseball, go to the Yankee Stadium, home of the New York Yankees or Shea Stadium for the Mets. At New York\'s finest arts cinema, the Film Forum, you can see the latest foreign and American movies.But New York itself is the subject of many movies by directors who come from New York, such as Woody Allen and Martin Scorsese. The great names of jazz have played in the jazz clubs of Greenwich Village, and fans can listen to the stars of today and tomorrow at the world-famous Blue Note. The Metropolitan Opera House is the place to go for opera lovers, but you have to book tickets a long time before you want to go.One of the most important things to see at Christmas is the Nutcracker by the New York City Ballet at Lincoln Centre.Carnegie Hall is well-known for its concerts of all types of music, claical and modern. Broadway is not just a street but an area of New York.There you can see some of the biggest and the best plays and musicals, such as Evita, Cats and The Phantom of the Opera.If you ever come to New York in summer, remember to spend a day in Central Park watching a play by Shakespeare in the open air, with famous actors from Broadway and Hollywood. For lovers of painting, the best plan is to go to the Museum of Modern Art or the Guggenheim Museum. Restaurants can be found everywhere, and are open at all times of the day or night.There have always been a huge number of Italian, Chinese and Japanese restaurants, but now you can eat food from Thailand, Vietnam, India, Burma or the Philippines.Try the Oyster Bar in Grand Central Station for the best seafood in Manhattan. New York\'s nightlife includes discos, like the Limelight, and night clubs.In fact, it\'s easy to see why they call it \"the city that never sleeps\".

Module 9 Unit 1 Listen and read.Betty: How much progre in English do you think you\'ve made this year, Lingling? Not bad.In fact, I think I\'ve achieved a lot, and I\'m proud of what I\'ve learnt.I\'ve reached a level which is quite good ...and I hope it\'s good enough for the exams, anyway.Above all, it\'s the subject that I\'m best at, Lingling: although my handwriting could be better.I think you\'ve done really well.Learning a foreign language requires a Betty: certain effort, however easy it is.I don\'t think it\'s really difficult to learn English, although it\'s a language which looks simpler than it actually is.I just hope I can continue to make Lingling: progre next year.Betty: Have you ever been to an English corner? You mean, those clubs where you go to practise your English? I always Lingling: thought they were for people whose English was already quite good.Well, I went to an English corner once, and there were some people whose level was fairly low.But it\'s good to meet other people who want to learn English, no matter how good their English is.And you can often meet some Betty: people who come from the UK or the USA.Anyway, what I like most is that you can use English wherever you go in Lingling: the world.Betty: But I wonder if there will soon be more people speaking Chinese.

Module 9 Unit 2 Work in pairs.Answer the questions.1.How many people in the world speak English? 2.When did English become an international language? 3.Why did English become so popular? 4.When will Chinese become an international language? 5.Who owns English? Now read the paage and check.

Who Owns English? is spoken by about 400 million people in Australia, Britain, Canada, Ireland, New Zealand, South Africa and the USA.In Ghana, India, Nigeria and Singapore, English is used for government, education and trade, although there are many other languages for everyday use.In China and most other countries, it\'s the most important foreign language that children will learn at school, because it\'s eential for tourism, international busine, entertainment, radio, television, newspapers, and the Internet.So English is now used by about 1.5 billion people—or a quarter of the world\'s population, and wherever you go in the world, there is a good chance that someone will speak English.How did this happen? English has not always been the most common language.Until English became important in the 20th century, people who had any education spoke French.What\'s more, English spelling doesn\'t give much help with pronunciation, and its grammar is difficult, especially the word order.The reason is that in the 18th century, the UK was a country whose industrial products were sold all over the world.In the 20th century, the USA spread English all over the world through newspapers, television, films and advertising.It\'s now the common language for international travel, science, industry and in recent years, information technology and the Internet.But it\'s also important to remember that English has borrowed many words from other languages, either exactly the same word or very similar.It uses restaurant from French, zero from Arabic, piano from Italian, and typhoon, china and many others words from Chinese.Will the importance of English last? Many people think that, if China continues to grow in importance, Chinese will become as common as English by the middle of the 21st century.More and more schools in Europe are teaching Chinese as a foreign language, in place of other European languages.And tourism puts China into the top 10 countries for visitors.But at least for the next 20 or 30 years, English will be the language used most widely.So who owns English? The answer is everyone who speaks it—the English, the Indians and the Chinese all help make it a rich language.It changes every year with new words and expreions.Even though there are differences in grammar, vocabulary, pronunciation and spelling, we all belong to the international English speaking world.We all own English.

Module 10 Unit 1 Look at the picture.Answer the questions.

1.What\'s the special event? 2.What is everybody doing? 3.Are you going to have a school leavers\' party? 4.Listen and read.Betty: You look lovely, Lingling! Lingling: Thanks, you look great, too.That\'s a nice handbag.Betty: It\'s my mother\'s.Are you enjoying the party? Yes, it\'s very enjoyable, but I feel a bit sad.I don\'t know when we\'ll be Lingling: back in this hall all together again.I\'m going to mi my clamates.Yes, but wherever you go, that will happen.Anyway, don\'t forget we\'re Tony: going to the USA for the vacation! The hall looks wonderful, Tony.You\'ve hung international flags from the Lingling: floor to the ceiling! Tony: Cool music, Daming! It\'s got a great beat! Daming: Pardon? Betty: But it\'s a bit noisy.Lingling: Do you intend to stay in China for long, Tony? Tony: I hope so.And even if I go back to the UK, I\'ll come back and visit you all.Lingling: What about you, Betty? I\'ll finish my high school education here, but I want to go back to my home Betty: town one day.What are your plans, Daming? I want to become ...an English teacher! Daming: (Laughter.) Tony: Come on! Let\'s fetch something to eat.What\'s on the menu? Betty: How about a hot dog? Or some ice cream? A sandwich? Lingling: And we\'ll always stay friends.Betty: Let\'s raise our glaes.Here\'s to our friendship, everyone ...and the future! And now, excuse me.I must make a speech! All: Cheers!

Module 10 Unit 2 Think about a speech at a school leavers\' party, and answer the questions.There may be more than one answer.1.Who is likely to be thanked?

a.Family. b.Schoolmates. c.Teachers. d.Strangers.2.What is the speaker likely to say?

a.Thank you. b.Good luck! c.I\'m sorry. d.Cheers! 3.Which personal qualities are likely to be mentioned?

a.Good behaviour. b.Bad temper. c.Patience. d.Good fun.Now read the paage and check.Head teacher, teachers, grandparents, parents and clamates, I\'m very proud that I have been chosen to speak to you all today.I\'m a bit nervous as I\'ve never made a speech before to so many people, so please forgive me if it shows! As we all know, this is the school leavers\' party, and it\'s time to say goodbye to everyone.We\'re sorry to leave you at the end of our junior high school education, and we promise that we\'ll never forget the happy times we have spent in these buildings with you all.I\'d like to thank three groups of people for the three things I\'ve learnt while I\'ve been a pupil at our school.The three things are friendship, love and knowledge.The first group is my friends, and what I\'ve learnt is the importance of friendship.We\'ve worked hard together, we\'ve even shared some difficult times together, but we\'ve also had a lot of fun.Many of us will go to new schools and we may not see each other so often in the future.Others will go on to senior high school and continue their close friendships.But friends don\'t have to see each other all the time.Sometimes the friends you treasure most are the friends you see le often.A life without old friends is like a day without sunshine.We\'ll always stay in touch.The second group is our parents and grandparents.We thank you for the love you have shown us during our years at junior high school, for making a home where we feel both safe and relaxed, and where we can prepare ourselves for our schooldays.We also thank you for your help with our homework.How many of us owe our good grades to the suggestions you have made during those long evenings? And finally, the third group is our teachers.We can never pay you back for your kindne, your patience, and gift of knowledge which you have offered us.Sometimes you\'ve been strict with us; sometimes you\'ve made us work very hard.But you have always been fair and you\'ll always be our role models.There\'s a saying from Ireland which is a favourite of mine: Strangers are only friends you haven\'t met yet.I couldn\'t say it better myself.So from the bottom of my heart, I thank you all and wish you succe for the future.

第12篇：外研版初二英语上单词

外研版初二英语上单词.

translate vt.翻译 translation n.翻译;译文,译本 correct a.正确的，对的 vt.改正；纠正 match vi.将...配对,匹配 n.比赛;火柴 number v.给...标号码 n.数字,号码 repeat v.重复 grammar n.语法

pronunciation n.语音；发音 writing n.书写；文章 punctuation n.标点符号 spelling n.拼写 term n.学期 advice n.建议；劝告 write down 写下；记下 mistake n.错误 notebook n.笔记本 else a.&adv.其他 radio n.收音机 newspaper n.报纸 meage n.信息；信 pen friend (英)笔友((美)pen pal) each pron.各个,每个 other pron.不同的人（或物） each other 互相

excellent a.好极了；卓越的，极好的 orchestra n.管弦乐队 send vt.发送,寄 language n.语言 improve vi.改善,提高 basic a.主要的；最重要的；基本的 watch v.看；注视；观察 n.手表 gue vt.vi.n.猜测,推测 just ad.请，就 yourself pron.你自己 enjoy yourself 过得快乐 shy a.害羞的 conversation n.谈话 deep a.深的 breath n.呼吸 smile v.&n.微笑 remember vt.记住;想起;记着 forget vt.忘记 piece n.一张 place n.地点；住所v.放置 count vt.计算 vi.数,计数 all the time 总是;一直 accent n.口音 wish vt.祝愿;想要n.希望 borrow v.借 group n.组 mark n.分数 club n.俱乐部 start v.发动; 创办; 开办n.开端 together ad.共同,一起 hear vt.听见 experience n.经验,经历 ever ad.曾经 competition n.竞争,竞赛 airport n.机场,航空港 cabin n.客舱 steward n.乘务员 captain n.机长;船长;队长 country n.国家 take off 起飞 before adv.以前 prep.在…以前 problem n.问题，难题 wonderful a.绝妙的；了不起的 prize n.奖品,奖金 reckon n.考虑; 认为 sound v.听起来 brilliant a.(口语)好极了 dream n.梦,梦想 vi.做梦;梦想 someone pron.某人,有人 kind a.仁慈的，友好的 n.种类 western a.西方的,西部的 come true 成为现实 abroad ad.在国外,到国外 fantastic a.极好的 anywhere ad.任何地方 Chinatown n.中国城,唐人街 Italian a.意大利(人)的,意大利语的 n.意大利人,意大利语 delicious a.美味的 pizza n.比萨饼 sandwich n.三明治 more than 超过,多于 sell vt.卖,销售 sell out 卖光 musician n.乐手；音乐家 dagger n.匕首；短剑 seat n.座位 beside prep.在…旁边 taste v.有...味道；品尝 only ad.仅仅；只 yet ad.还;尚 stone n.石头 climb vi.vt.攀登,爬 roast duck vt.烤鸭 palace n.宫殿 another a.再一个的,又一的 pron.又一个；再一个 seafood n.海产品，海鲜 entertainment n.娱乐 time n.次 name 说出...的名字 Earth n.地球 Mars n.火星 already ad.早已,已经 just ad.刚才,刚刚 model n.模型 station n.站;所;局;车站 space station 太空站；宇宙空间站 panic n.(使)感到惶恐 latest a.最近的；最新的 several a.几个的，数个的 month n.月 discover v.发现 recently ad.最近

space shuttle 航天飞机 show v.展示；给…看 over prep.多于 planet n.行星

solar system 太阳系 also ad.也；同样 none pron.没有一个 environment n.环境 air n.空气 grow v.生长,种植 part n.部分 galaxy n.星系 billion num.十亿 universe n.宇宙 light n.光线;电灯 beyond prep.在…之外 alone a.孤单的，孤独的 entrance n.入口 cost n.价钱为；花费 prefer vt.更喜爱 diary n.日记 even adv.甚至 Jupiter n.木星 secret n.秘密a.秘密的 real a.真实的；真正的 twice ad.两次 explore v.勘探；探测 miion n.任务 unmanned a.不载人的 study v.学习,研究 teach vt.教

head teacher 校长 since conj.&prep.从…以来 get on well with 与...相处融洽 same a.相同的；同一的 hear about 听到 poor a.贫穷的；可怜的 project n.计划；工程 still ad.仍然，依旧 raise v.筹集 take part 参加 describe vt.形容,描述 drop vt.扔；落下

drop out of school 退学

important a.重要的 ill a.生病的 look after 照顾 pay v.支付,付 countryside n.乡下,农村 train vt.培训；训练 electricity n.电 hear of 听说 perhaps ad.也许,可能 nearly ad.几乎，差不多 luckily ad.幸运地 point vi.指着，指 n.点;分 organisation n.组织；机构 health n.健康 care n.护理；照料 leaflet n.传单 blues n.布鲁斯 claical a.古典的,经典的 jazz n.爵士乐,爵士舞曲 pop n.流行音乐 rock n.摇摆乐 techno n.电子音乐 beautiful a.美的,美丽的 dramatic a.有戏剧性的 fun n.有趣的事；逗人乐的活动 lively a.活泼的；轻快的 sad a.悲伤的 serious a.严肃的；严重的 slow a.慢的

traditional a.传统的 sure a.肯定的 German a.德国的；德国人的；德语的 n.德国人；德语 Austrian n.奥地利人 a.奥地利的；奥地利人的 composer n.作曲家 fan n.狂热爱好者，迷 rap n.说唱乐 on earth 究竟，到底 noisy a.吵闹的 centre n.中心 drum n.鼓 guitar n.吉他 organ n.管风琴 trumpet n.小号 violin n.小提琴 elder a.年长的 waltz n.华尔兹；圆舞曲 younger a.年幼的 die vi.死；去世 addition n.添加,添加物 in addition to 除…之外 rest n.剩余部分；休息 maybe ad.大概,也许 phone n.电话 actually ad.实际上,事实上 instrument n.乐器 of course 当然 type n.种类 loud a.响亮的 gospel n.福音音乐 string n.弦

part-time a.兼职的 milkman n.送牛奶的人 recording n.录音室 record n.唱片 v.录音 own a.自己的 artist n.艺术家,美术家 figure n.人物;名人 century n.世纪,百年 suddenly ad.突然 rabbit n.兔子 party n.聚会 fall vi.下落；跌落 hole n.洞,孔 strange a.奇怪的 carry vt.携带；拿着；抱着 tired a.劳累的 nothing pron.没有什么；没有东西 once ad.一次 daisy n.雏菊 chain n.链,项圈 pink n.粉色a.粉色的 by prep.经；由 pocket n.衣袋，兜 acro prep.越过 field n.田野 under prep.在…下面 hedge n.树篱 go off 熄灭；停 storm n.暴风雨；暴风雪 outside ad.在外面 jump v.跳 scream v.尖叫；惊呼 during prep.在…期间 noon n.正午,中午 bookshop n.书店 staff n.全体职员；全体雇员 wear v.穿；戴 clap v.鼓掌 cheer v.欢呼 perform v.表演；施行 gold n.金；黄金 ring n.戒指 hall n.大厅 follow vt.跟随；紧跟 stop v.停止；停下 water skiing 滑水运动 baby n.婴儿 whale n.鲸 ocean n.大洋；海洋 amazing a.令人高兴的；令人吃惊的 mi vt.思念 feeling n.情绪,感觉 impreion n.印象 smell v.闻，嗅；闻起来 feel v.摸起来；感觉 quiet a.安静的；轻声的 salty a.咸的 sour a.酸的 tight a.过紧的 shoe n.鞋 soup n.汤 dear int.哎呀 guy n.家伙,人；伙伴 matter n.问题；事件 cheese n.奶酪 fresh a.新鲜的 cookie n.小甜饼 try n.努力；尝试 lovely a.可爱的 sweater n.厚运动衫;毛线衣 both pron.两个,两个都 smart a.漂亮的,时髦的 pretty a.漂亮的 must v.aux.必须 introduce v.介绍 later ad.后来;以后 soft a.柔软的 nervous a.紧张的,情绪不安的 hair n.头发 dark a.发黑的；暗色的,黑暗的 fair a.金黄的；白皙的 glaes n.眼镜 recognise v.认出，识别 quite ad.十分,相当 dance v.跳舞 n.舞蹈 especially ad.特别,尤其,格外 proud a.骄傲的；自豪的 stupid a.愚蠢的；笨的 angry a.生气的 a bit 稍微；有点儿 stranger n.陌生人 excited a.激动的；兴奋的 bicycle n.自行车 shake v.摇晃

shake hands 握手 polite a.礼貌的 rude a.粗鲁的, 无礼的 stare vi.盯着看 bank n.银行 market n.市场

supermarket n.超市 pool n.水池，池塘 swimming pool 游泳池 square n.广场 left a.左边的ad.向左边n.左边，左侧 right a.正确的;右边的ad.向右n.右边 revolutionary a.革命的n.革命者 opposite a.对面的 adv.在对立 prep.在...的对面 chairman n.主席 memorial n.纪念物；纪念碑 between prep.在…中间 turn v.转向,转弯 corner n.街道拐角处；角落 along prep.沿着 tour n.旅行 gallery n.美术馆 painting n.油画;绘画 parliament n.议会,国会 clear a.清晰的；晴朗的 boat n.船 off prep.下（飞机、车、船等） tower n.塔 tourist n.游客 a.旅游的；游览的 guidebook n.手册；指南 religious a.宗教的 danger n.危险 protect vt.保护 orange n.桔子；橘色 a.橘色的 cousin n.同类；堂(表)兄弟(姐妹) brown a.棕色的 n.褐色,棕色 reserve n.禁猎区，自然保护区 mad a.季度激动的；发狂似的 surprising a.使人惊讶的；出人意料的 kill v.杀死 absolutely ad.的确，一点不错 hard a.硬的,困难的 away ad.…掉；…去 dirty a.脏的 awful a.极讨厌的；极不愉快的 peace n.和平；安宁 find out 查明；找到；发现 rare a.稀有的；珍贵的 example n.例子 nature n.大自然;自然界 nature reserve 自然保护区 surprised a.惊奇的，吃惊的 research n.调查,探究 southwest n.西南 a.西南的 mainly ad.主要地，大体地 live on 靠…生活；以…为食 reason n.原因

le and le 越来越少 situation n.情况 symbol n.标志 turtle n.海龟 cause n.原因,起因 feed v.喂养 v.为...提供食物 design v.设计 n.设计,图样 jewellery n.珠宝，首饰 for example 例如 provide v.提供 difficulty a.困难 clean a.清洁的,干净的 pollute v.污染 teahouse n.茶馆 main a.主要的；最大的 interest n.兴趣,爱好 offer v.提议；给予 agree vi.同意 almost ad.几乎,差不多 impoible a.不可能的 whisper v.低语；耳语 special a.特殊的,特别的 take place 发生 audience n.观众 customer n.顾客 dynasty n.王朝；朝代 lose vt.失去,失败 master n.大师 twentieth num.第二十 waiter n.男服务员 folk a.民间的 acrobatics n.杂技表演 enjoyable a.让人感到快乐的 performance n.表演；表现 full a.装满的,充满的；完全的 silver n.银,银子 cloud n.云 shower n.阵雨;淋浴 centigrade n.摄氏温度 degree n.度,度数 temperature n.温度;体温 freezing adj.冰冻的；严寒的 snowy a.下雪的，多雪的 joke v.开玩笑；说笑话 wet a.湿的，湿润的 might v.aux.可能 windy a.刮大风的；多风的 probably ad.可能，或许 sunny a.阳光充足的 cool a.凉爽的,凉快的 dry a.干的，干燥的 cloudy a.多云的 camera n.照相机 swimsuit n.游泳衣 northwest n.西北 a.西北的 umbrella n.伞,雨伞 pleasant a.令人愉快的; 舒适的 southeast n.东南 a.位于东南的 from time to time 时常，有时，不时 fall n.秋天 compared to 和...相比较 poible a.可能的 stormy a.有暴风雨的 shine v.照耀,发光 n.光 depend v.依靠,依赖 best of all 最好的 railcard n.货车优惠卡 truly ad.真诚地；诚挚地 che n.国际象棋 set n.棋盘 chopstick n.筷子 purse n.（女式）钱包 soap n.肥皂 chat vi.n.闲谈,聊天 move n.动作；行动 hang vt.悬挂,吊 hang on (耐心)等待 immediately adv.立即,马上 accept vt.vi.接受,同意 wrap vt.裹,包装 lucky a.幸运的

do some cleaning 打扫卫生 break v.打破,打碎 anything pron.任何东西；任何事情 receive v.收到；接到 custom n.风俗习惯 greet vt.问候,打招呼 noise n.噪音；嘈杂声 wedding n.婚礼 stay n.逗留，停留 light a.(餐食)少量的 around adv.大约 pour v.倒；倾倒 mobile a.移动的 shout v.高声说；大声喊 throw vt.扔；抛 shoulder n.肩，肩膀 catch v.抓住,接住 body n.身体,躯干 wash up 洗餐具 smoke v.吸烟 paport n.护照 litter n.垃圾 pavement n.人行横道 waste bin n.垃圾箱 cheerful a.快乐的,令人愉快的 skin n.皮, 皮肤;毛皮 villager n.村民 bow v.鞠躬

第13篇：外研版小学英语四年级教学工作总结

小学英语四年级下教学工作总结

百龙滩镇大龙小学 潘金凤

时间飞逝，一转眼一个学期已经过去,回顾教学工作.有令人欣慰的收获,又有困饶自己教学的不足.本学期我担任四年级的英语教学工作，我始终坚持课前认真备课，做到既备教材，又备学生，因材施教，努力实施课堂改革，积极探索小学英语快乐课堂，小学阶段英语教学的目的是：激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养学生学习英语的积极性，使他们树立学习英语的自信心，同时培养学生一定的语感和良好的语音、语调基础，为进一步学习打下基础。在英语课堂教学中，怎样创设良好的学习氛围、激发学生的学习兴趣是小学英语教学工作的重要一环。下面结合教学实践，我把本学期的教学工作总结如下：

一、认真备课、面向全体授课

在教学中，认真备课，认真阅读各种教科参考书，结合自己的教学经验与学生的学习情况，认真编写好教案制定好教学计划，并不断地加以改善修改，在传授学生知识的同时，关心爱护学生，特别是差生，课堂密切注意他们，教育他们求学勿半途而废，在思想教育的同时，还耐心地辅导学生复习遗漏知识。使他们的学习成绩跟上班里的其他同学。帮助他们树立学好各门知识的信心。

二、向课堂的40分钟要效果

第一、在课堂上，认真授课，采用多媒体教学及运用实物教具、简笔画，情景教学、手势语言等方法来启发、教育学生。教学生做游戏、唱英语歌等来激发学生的学习兴趣。鼓励学生大胆质疑，注重以学生为主体、教师为导的教学方法，充分调动学生的学习积极性。学生有疑难和不懂读的地方，我总是不厌其烦地讲解、分析、带读，力争让他们学了就懂，懂了会用。

第

二、在批改作业方面。学生的作业总是及时地批改，并详细地做好批注，对普遍性错误，在全班重复讲解、分析。针对个别学生的作业还采取面批方法，一一地分析讲解、帮助学生解决疑难习题，大大提高了教学质量。 第

三、在听力方面。为提高学生的听力水平，常让学生听英语歌曲及课文对话的录音磁带，还让学生背书。

三、不足之处

由于时间和精力有限，在课堂上，对于每个学生的的关注可能还不够，对于小学的心理掌握也不太有经验，在经后的工作中，我将加强对于每个同学的监督，保证每个同学都跟上进度，不落下任何一个有进取心的学生。

总之、一学期以来，本人勤勤垦垦地做好各项教学工作，孜孜不倦地传授给学生各种英语知识，努力开发快乐课堂，取得了一定的成效，学生的成绩也有了很大的提高。

2016年07月05日

第14篇：外研版小学英语四年级教学工作总结

外研版小学英语四年级教学工作总结

培养学生的兴趣，兴趣是最好的老师，爱因斯坦是这样说的。学生对于自己感兴趣的事物，自然会用更多的时间钻研。

一学期来，我自始至终以认真的态度，勤恳、坚持不懈的精神从事英语教学工作。能够在教育理论指导下从事英语教学。能够认真制定教学计划，研究教学理论，新课程标准，理念。有针对性地应用于教学活动当中。同时在教学过程中，能够根据学生的特点采取不同的教学方法，取得了一些的成绩。下面就以下几个方面进行总结，请予以批评指正，使我在今后的教育教学工作中取得更大的进步。

首先，根据我所任教四年级的实际情况，因而对占相对多数的中差生，我变嫌弃为喜爱，变忽视为重视，变冷漠为关注，变薄待为厚待。我注意帮助每一个孩子找到优、缺点，以发扬优点，克服缺点。

其次是以平常的心态对待：学困生也是孩子，厌恶、责骂只能适得其反，他们应享有同其它学生同样的平等和民主，也应享受到优秀学生在老师那儿得到的爱。厚爱学困生，我真正做到以情动人：首先做到\"真诚\"二字，即我在学生面前不敢有丝毫虚伪与欺哄，做到言出必行；其次做到\"接受\"，即能感受差生在学习过程中的各种心理表现和看法，如对学习的畏惧、犹豫、满足、冷漠，错误的想法和指责等，信任中差生，鼓励他们自由讨论；最后做到\"理解\"二字，即通过学生的眼睛看事物。由于我能善意理解他们，高兴地接受他们，因此促进了中差生不同程度的进步和发展。

最后，认真制定教学计划，注重研究教学理论，认真备课和教学，积极参加教研活动，上好辅导课，并能经常听各位老师的课，从中吸取教学经验，取长补短，提高自己的教学水平。按照小学英语教学课程标准进行施教，让学生掌握好学科知识。还注意以德为本，结合现实生活中的现象循循善诱，多方面、多角度去培养学生良好的品德和高尚的人格。

教育是爱心事业，为培养高素质的下一代，本人时刻从学生身心健康出发，根据学生的个性特点去点拔引导。对于个别学困生，鼓励其确立正确的学习态度，积极面对人生；而对优生，教育其戒骄戒躁努力向上，再接再厉，再创佳绩。通过现实生活中的典范，让学生树立自觉地从德、智、体、美、劳全方面去发展自己的观念，树立崇高远大的理想。在课堂把握上，课前做到认真备课，多方面去搜集相关资料。为提高每节课的教学质量，本人除注重研究教材，把握好基础、重点难点外，还采用多媒体教学等多样形式。通过培养学生学习英语的兴趣，调动学生学习的积极性、主动性，提高课堂的教学质量，按时完成教学任务。

最后，能制定好复习计划，并能认真备好复习课，制定复习计划并付诸于教学过程中。同时能够认真布置和批改课后作业，争取不让作业成为学生的一种负担。把教学技巧,有趣的教学歌谣和故事、游戏运用到新标准的教学之中，为课堂教学增色不少。

由于本人的不懈努力,在教育教学上取得了一些成绩。当然，由于教学是一项永远没有终点的运动，因此，在教学过程中走了不少弯

路，我知道自己还有许多不足之处。我会在今后的教学过程中逐步改正和完善教育教学方法，争取更大进步。

第15篇：九年级英语上学期教学工作总结

2013—2014学年度九年级英语上学期教学工作总结

丁景文

时间真快,紧张而又繁忙的一学期又要结束了。回顾起来，既忙碌又充实。今年我担任的九年级三，四班的英语，感到压力沉重。因为学生的学习自觉性较差，而九年级是整个初中阶段最重要一年，针对这种情况，通过与学生沟通，在平时的教学中分层次教学，注意培养学生对英语的兴趣和学习的动力，最大努力提高学生的英语成绩，现就工作做如下总结：

一．抓好教学常规工作，为中考做好准备。

1）课前认真地备好每一节课，写好教案。既备教材，又备学生，熟读考试大纲，做到心中有数，每天都花费大量的时间在备课、做试卷，认认真真钻研教材和教法，充分准备好每一堂课，让学生多动手，多动口、多动脑，充分调动学生的主观能动性，力图让课堂成为学生展示的平台，让学生学有所得，学有所乐。2）作业和辅导：认真批改学案，有针对性地对学困生进行辅导，对于他们重点放在巩固单词、重点句型、简单句及变化，几种语法的结构、常用表达等方面；优生主要是做好能力题并且多掌握一些做题方法，再根据自身实际情况多做些中考题，平时从亢实好基础知识，增大听写单词量，到听写重点句子抓起，每次小测后对有进步的学生多鼓励，表扬。对成绩中等的学生做好辅导工作，做到有耐心，有方

法，因材施教， 3）考试方面：本学期根据学校的要求应进行多次模拟考试，我每次认真做好试卷讲评和总结分析，调整教学，对学生知识不足的地方进行查漏补缺，对存在个别问题的学生课后多指点，纠正错误并做好思想工作。4）对自己工作中的不足及时调整，在九课竞赛前我们通过教研一致认为我们的学生习题练得太少，做题速度慢，技巧跟不上，所以连续弄了几套模拟试题给学生进行强化训练，而后我们判卷，分析，说服教育学生，几天下来，累得我们都说颈椎疼，为了学生，我们不怕累，不怕苦，虽然我教的这两个班英语成绩一直不好觉得自己尽力了，我一直在想，只要我们组共同努力，学生的总体成绩不会很差。

二．认真组织课堂教学，建设高效的课堂。

因为课堂是我们教学的主阵地，课堂教学的成败直接影响着教学效果，所以上课我设法吸引学生，不让其分心，上课内容力求丰富，现实。课堂内容有梯度，分层次教学，树立学生的自信心，让各层次的学生都得到提高，在课堂上采用多种教学方式，利用多媒体、展示台等现代化教学手段，充分调动学生的积极性，加强师生交流，使他们能在轻松、愉快、合作、交流中学到知识。加强听说、阅读、写作训练，以促进学生的综合运用能力。为了让学生真正参

加到课堂中来，凡是学生自己能讲清楚的问题，都让学生自己解决，课堂上尽量精讲、少讲把时间都留给学生。

三．加强自身的业务水平，更加完善自己

经过几年的教学工作，自己的不断探索，认真参与教改，学习先进的教学方法和经验，尽力改正课堂上讲多练少的缺点，要把学生放在第一位，多给他们思考的时间，虽然今年我所教的两个班的英语成绩不很理想，我坚持只要自己尽心尽力，做到无怨无悔。另外积极对各种教育理论进行学习，给自己充电，以便在工作中以坚实的理论作为指导，更好地进行教育教学；平时多做中考试题，有问题就大家讨论，努力提高英语专业水平，以适应当前教育的形式，为更好地进行素质教育夯实基础，平时多与学生交流做好他们的心理工作，为中考做更好的准备。本学期任务很重，在下学期的复习中，还要注意把整个初中的知识进行梳理，归纳总结，同时要做足够的练习，把更多的重点和考点展示给学生，使学生们对知识能够学以致用，对中考做好充分的思想准备。为了能让学生们在中考考试中考出好成绩，作为教师，我尽职尽责，努力提高自身业务，努力提高学生的成绩。

四．激发学生的兴趣：

培养学生良好的学习习惯和兴趣是学好英语的关键，为了提高学生学习英语的兴趣，我们利用多媒体，报纸，课件，小组合作等多种方式来进行教学，以增强学生学习英语的兴趣，

五．培优辅差

培养优等生和转化差生，及时总结。因为英语学习是语言的学习，因此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持把早读任务具体化，确保学生高效率完成早读任务。课后发现学生学案中存在的问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。平时更关注部分不自觉的同学，关心、鼓励她们，有时也采取强制听写、背诵等方式，帮助他们养成良好习惯，提高他们的英语学习能力。对差生，我也制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。我把这批同学分为三个组。第一组是有能力提高，但平时懒动脑筋不学的同学，对这些同学，我采取集体辅导，利用课后时间给他们分配固定任务，不让他们有偷懒的机会，让他们发挥应有水平； 第二组是肯学，但由于能力不强的同学。对这部分同学要适当引导，耐心指导学习方法，慢慢提高他们的成绩，不能操之过急，且要多鼓励。只要他们肯努力，成绩有望能提高；第三组是纪律松散，学习不认真，基础又不好的同学。对这部分人要进行降低要求，只抓基础知识，鼓励他们书写规范，

不要让试卷空白，排除个位分数现象。只要用心辅导，与学生建立良好的师生关系，以后授课的效果就会更好。

总之，这一学期由于所教的这两个班级英语成绩一直不好，我不知道中考将会怎样？我想只要我自己努力了，就问心无愧，更重要的是在以后的教学中如何吸取今年的不足来完善自己，使自己在以后的教学中有所提高。因此，无论怎样辛苦，我也会继续努力学习新的教学经验，不断的丰富完善自己，使自己成为一名更合格的老师。

第16篇：九年级英语上工作总结

九年级英语上教学反思

眨眼之间在和学生互相学习、共同生活的时间里很快又临近期末。在这个学期里我比较圆满地完成了本学期的工作，回顾这学期的工作，使我感到既繁忙又充实，我的教学思想和教学水平都有所进步。下面我将这一学期的个人工作总结如下：

一、思想政治方面

在这学期的教学工作中, 我自始至终以认真、严谨的工作态度，勤恳、坚持不懈的工作精神从事英语教学。我积极响应学校的各项号召；积极参加各种学习活动；认真领会学习内容；以教师职业道德规范为准绳，严格要求自己。思想积极向上，不断进取。在教学中，能够做到为人师表，关爱学生，帮助学生对英语学习充满学习热情和信心，以健康文明的形象言传身教。

二、教学方面：

课前准备。真正做到吃透课本，认真备课。我认真钻研课本，掌握住知识点，认真备好每一堂课。课本是教学的依据,同时也是学生学习的主要参考书，我在熟练课本的根本上传授本课程的内容，在备课过程中，以不摆脱课本的原则，参考其他教科书；使用学案举行二次备课，寻求让学生更简单接纳的教法，力图实现“因材施教，当堂达标”。

课堂传授。课堂传授是学生接纳新知识，老师教学新知识的一个是主要渠道。在课堂传授中，我始终如一地贯彻了英语新课程准则的理念和“因学施教，当堂达标”的学案导学模式，采纳职司型传授的式样组织传授，以提高学生的英语学习兴趣为主线，以提高学生的综合语言运用才能为主要方向。策画百般趣味的、贴近学生生活的活动来实现新知识的教学。同时，突出学生的主体地位和老师的主导职位，引导学生自主学习，互助探究。实践证明，这种以提高学生学习兴趣和综合语言运用才能为经线，以职司型传授和贴近生活现实的一系列活动为纬线编织的讲堂传授网络，积极调动了学生学习的主动性和创造性，创建了一个开心高效的英语传授讲堂。

学生学习。我始终坚持面向全体学生，从学生现实出发，旨在提高学生的知识运用才能。学生综合表达能力不强，这主要表现在作文上。学生在每次写作文之前，总是觉得无话可说，乃至无从着手。为了提高学生们的写作水平，我每周给学生布置一篇话题作文，话题都是选择与学生生存相关的话题，让学生有话可说，如：My hobby ； My last trip to„, ect .这样，学生的学习兴趣提高了，综合表达才能也有所提高。但是作文程度的提高不是一朝一夕的事，还有必要在以后的教学中继续坚持。

课下引导。由于学生在陆续学习中，会出现好差分裂形象，落伍生比例扩大。每次教了新单词以后，我都准时抽时间给他们听写，并认真删改。并且课文里出现的精美实用的句子，我也要学生背下来。我把 4个同学分成一个小组，让他们相互比较，好同学担当小组长，这样想偷懒就较难了。 这样做以后，逐渐提高标准，学生学到的就多了。针对落伍生出现的成绩差的现象，对他们进行了多种类别的引导，如一对一的学生帮扶、小组内及小组间比赛以增强落伍生的自信心、个体引导、重点鞭策与家长疏导等。经历一段时间的引导，他们都有不同程度的进步，学习的兴趣和自信心也大大升高。

参考之资。在讲堂传授之余，我还主动加入教研活动，参与我们英语组内的备课和上公开课。 多听课,学习有经验老师的传授要领。因为教学水平的提高在于勤奋学习、积聚体验。老教师具有丰富的教学经验，积聚了很多教学技能，作为新老师应多向他们学习，尽快提升自身的教学能力。听课的同时，认真做听课记录。听完课后写听课心得，如哪些地方是自己不具备的，哪些地方可以怎样讲也许有更好的效果等等。要求自己每听一节课都要获得成绩。必要时还可与授课老师举行讨论，以懂得其授课安排的依据。经历这样的活动，有力地提高了自己对课本的理解。

课下监视：学生爱动、好玩，缺乏学习的自控才能和自主性：常在学习上不准时完成作业；有的学生剽窃作业，针对这些问题，就要勤抓学生的思维教诲，并使这一做事贯彻到对学生的学习指导中去，还要做好对学生学习的引导和帮助做事，尤其在落伍生的转化上，对落伍生做到从友爱开始，从生存上体贴他。监视检验学生笔记，务必定期抽查学生是否准时做笔记，并鞭策其把总结在笔记本上的知识点掌握住。

存在的不足。在这一个学期的教学中，感觉自己还存在许多的不足：对课本的掌握不足，上课的逻辑性不够强，讲堂的衔接还不够自然流利等等。许多出色的老师的长处都没有学到，听课的次数也还不够多，在下个学期应多向其他老师学习，提升自己的教学水平。

教师这个职业要求教师在教学中不断研讨并结合自己的实际状况不断探索；必须和学生一起发展；必须有百分百的热情与爱心。总之，在这一学期的教学中，我爱岗敬业、尽职尽责地完成了自己的本职工作，在教学上取得了进步。但由于经验不足，在以后的教学中，我将不断总结、努力提高自己的思维德行品质和教学技能。

第17篇：新版外研九年级上册各模块英语作文

Module 1

（一）假如你是王红，你的朋友马丽将来你这里度假，请你给她介绍一下你市北海滩的情况。Dear Ma LI, I’m very glad to hear that you will travel to my city.Now let me tell you something about my city.My city is famous for Beihai Beach.The Beihai Beach is in the north of my city, about 8 kilometres away.It’s one of the best beaches in our city.The sand is fine, soft and clean.The water is clear with small waves.It’s suitable for swimming and playing beach volleyball.Many people come here to spend their holidays.Everyone says it’s a beautifully place to travel.The people here are very friendly.I think you will have a good time here.I’m looking forward to your coming.Yours, Wang Hong

（二）在假期中，几乎每个人都参观过自己喜欢的地方。现在请你以导游的身份，向你的游客介绍一下他们即将参观的城市。

提示：1.下一站到哪个城市参观；

2.那个城市的自然景观；

3.有哪些地方值得浏览。Ladies and gentlemen, I’m your guide today.We are going to visit Guilin.First, I’d like to tell you something about Guilin before we arrive.Guilin is in the north of Guangxi.The population of the city is six hundred thousand. Guilin is famous for its beautiful scenery in the world.The hills are green and the water is clear.The environment here is clean and tidy.Every year a lot of tourists come to visit it.You can see the scenes of the Li River by boat.You can also see the scenic spots in the city on free buses.

I hope you will enjoy yourselves in Guilin.Module 2

（一）假设你叫李岩，你的美国朋友Ted想向你了解一下中国人是如何庆祝中秋节的，请你给他写一封信介绍一下。要求70词左右，信的开头和结尾已给出，但不计入总词数。

提示词语：a harvest festival, enjoy the moonlight, eat moon cakes Dear Ted, How are you? You said that you wanted to know something about Mid-Autumn Festival.I am very glad to tell you something about it.Mid-Autumn Festival is a harvest festival.Farmers begin to harvest fruit and vegetables.It is a big time for families and friends to get together.On that evening, the moon looks brighter and rounder.Many families sit around a table and enjoy the beautiful moonlight.We always have a big dinner.We also eat moon cakes and fruit.I hope you can come and celebrate Mid-Autumn Festival with us next year.

Best wishes to you!

Yours, 1

Li Yan

（二）假如你是李磊，你的美国朋友Tom对各个国家的节日文化很感兴趣。请用英语给他介绍一个中国传统节日。 Dear Tom, I’m glad to tell you something about Chinese Spring Festival.The Spring Festival is very important in my country.It usually come in January or February. It’s time to say goodbye to the old year and welcome the new.We usually clean and decorate our house carefully before it comes.As soon as the Spring Festival comes, we put on chunlian on the door and chuanghua on the window.It means the start of the celebration. We celebrate the Spring Festival by eating a traditional dinner in the evening before the Spring Festival.There’s so much delicious food.We eat jiaozi— a kind of dumpling.After the dinner, we usually watch a special programme on TV. We always visit the relatives and friends and say “Happy New Year” to each other.When kids greet their grandparents, they can get lucky money.The celebration lasts until Yuan Xiaojie comes.Yours, Li Lei

Module 3

（一）成龙是国内外著名的电影演员，他出演的很多电影都深受人们的喜爱。请以My Favourite Hero为题介绍成龙的文章。

My Favourite Hero

Jackie Chan is my favourite hero.He is one of the most famous film stars in China and in the world.

Jackie Chan was born in Hong Kong in 1954.His family was poor when he was young.He studied in a drama school in Hong Kong for ten years.Later, he became an actor.He makes action films more interesting and makes the world pay more attention to Chinese film today.He also likes to help others and he has helped lots of poor the sick people in the world.He loves life and he is a hard-working man.His films make him a hero.

I think he is one of the most succeful men in the world.

（二）刘伟，无臂(armle)钢琴演奏者。他十岁时在一次意外事故中失去双臂，但他并没有放弃成为一名钢琴家的梦想。经过刻苦用脚练习弹琴，他最终在“中国达人秀”(China’s Got Talent)的舞台上实现了自己的梦想。请根据以上内容写篇英语短文。

要求：1.简要描述刘伟的经历。2.谈谈从他的经历中你得到的启示。

Liu Wei, an armle piano player, has a very special experience.He lost his arms in an accident when he was 10, but he didn’t give up his dream of being a pianist.He tried to practice playing the piano with his feet.Finally he realized his dream in “China Got Talent”.

As a student, I’ve learnt a lot from his story.We may meet a lot of difficulties in our future life, but we should believe that our dream will come true by working hard.No matter how hard life is, we won’t fail unle we give up our hope.2

Module 4

一、某英文报社正就青少年与父母关系这一话题开展题为“How to Keep Good Relationship with Parents”的征文活动。请你根据以下要点，写一篇80词左右的英语短文参加此次活动；

要点提示：1.父母规矩太多，过于强调学习成绩、不理解自己等问题。

2.你对这些问题的看法。

3.你与父母保持良好关系的做法。

How to Keep Good Relationship with Parents

In my opinion, I have too many rules at home.My parents never allow me to go out with my friends at nights.They don’t allow me to choose my own clothes, either.And they pay too much attention to my exam results.I don’t think my parents quite understand me.

However, I try my best to understand them.Although they don’t allow me to make my own decisions and give me too much preure, I know that it is because they really love me and want me to have a bright future.

In order to keep good relationship with my parents, I study hard, listen to them, talk to them as friends, tell them my troubles , and help them do more housework.

二、暑假就要到了，你和你的同学们正在讨论暑假计划，你也提出了自己的打算。请你根据以下提示内容以My Summer Holiday为题，介绍你暑假打算怎么过。

提示：1.坚持锻炼身体；

2.根据个人兴趣和需要安排学习；

3.帮助家人做家务。

要求：暑假生活除必须写以上3项内容外，其他活动（1-2项）可适当发挥。

My Summer Holiday

The summer holiday is coming at once.During the holiday, the first thing I’ll do is to get relaxed after the exams.I’ll go on doing morning exercises every day.In the afternoon I’ll go fishing if I’m free.I like playing the computer so much that I’m going to surf the Internet and try to find some useful information.I’d like to spend some time reading books because I like reading .Because my Chinese is a little weak, I’m going to read more books on Chinese than on any other subject.On the other hand I’ll help my parents do some housework as much as poible.I’d like to visit some of my friends and relatives as well.I’m sure I will have a good time this summer.Module5 你家附近有个大图书馆，馆内有许多书，请你将这个图书馆的要求介绍给你的同学，以便他们去那儿看书时能遵守这些规定。 规定：1.不要把包带进图书馆 ；

2.看书时保持安静,不要大声喧哗，到处跑动。3.馆内禁止吸烟；

4.每次可借四本书；不能将书转借给别人；按时还书；

5.下午六点前离开图书馆，图书馆六点关门。

There is a big library near my home.It is very good and I often go there to do some reading.There are all kinds of books in it.When you read in the library, 3

you should follow these rules: Don’t take your bags into the library.You must keep quiet while you are reading.There is no shouting or running around in it.You mustn’t smoke in the library.You can borrow four boobs at a time, but you mustn’t lend them to others.Remember to return the books on time.You’d better leave the library before 6:00 pm, because it closes at 6:00 pm.Follow the rules and you’ll enjoy yourself in it.Module 6

一、

The Way to Keep Healthy

Health has become a very important part of our life.There are many ways to keep healthy.

First, you can eat more fruits and vegetables, and you’d better drink more warm water.Next, you have to do lots of exercise, and have at least 8 hours’ sleep every night.Remember not to drink coffee or tea before before you go to bed.Don’t eat too much sugar and don’t work or study too late because it will make you very tired.If you care about yourself, it’s easy to have a healthy lifestyle.

二、成长中每个人都要面对烦恼，并解决问题。假设你叫刘明，是美国中学生生艾丽斯的朋友，你收到了她的电子邮件，请给她回复，回答她的问题，提出你的建议，并就此事谈谈你的看法。

邮件内容包括：

1.你是否遇到过这样的问题；

2.该借给她钱还是不借给她钱；

3.若她忘记归还该怎么办。

注意：1.恰当运用条件状语从句，句子结构要完整；

2.词数：80左右。Dear Liu Ming, Hi! I’m so sad.Angela is a close friend of mine.This morning she wanted to borrow some money from me.If I lend her the money, I’m afraid she won’t pay me back.I don’t know what to do.Do you have the same problem? I need your help.I’m looking forward to hearing from you soon.Yours, Alice

Dear Alice,

I’m glad to hear from you.

Yes, I sometimes have the same problem.I think if she really needs the money, you’d better lend it to her.You don’t need to worry too much.She’ll probably pay you back when she has money.If you don’t lend her the money, I’m afraid you may lose the friend.If she really forgets about the money, you can remind her in a polite way.For example, you can ask her if the money helped her at that time. I think everyone may have trouble in life and we should help each other.So 4

when my friends need money, I will try my best to help her.Maybe I’ll get it back, or maybe I won’t.

I hope what I said can help you.Yours, Liu Ming

Module 7

一、目前中学生学习任务重、压力大。而广泛的阅读有利于开阔视野，调节身心。在课业学习和业余生活中，你喜欢阅读吗？你读名著吗？或许有些名著给你留下了深刻的印象，对你有一定的影响。请就这个话题谈一谈。

I love reading.I spend some time reading every day, though I have too much everyday homework.I especially enjoy reading some great works.I have read Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain, one of the greatest American writers.It describes people’s lives in the southern states of America at that time.It tells how young people grow.It influences me a lot.I learn how people love each other.By reading it , I also know how bad people pay for their actions .It is thought to be one of the greatest American stories.

二、

My Favourite Newspaper

Century Weekly is my favourite newspaper.

It is an English newspaper.It is published in Beijing each week.There are plenty of beautiful pictures and interesting articles in it.I enjoy reading the paper.I read it to improve my English.I have learnt a lot of new words and useful expreions.Besides, I can get information about different things, from politics to sports and music.Century weekly is very popular with students and English learners.I really love it.

Module 8

一、

Let’s Do Exercise Together

It’s very important for us to do exercise.Doing exercise can not only help us keep healthy, but also help to train a person’s character.What’s more, doing exercise helps us to study better.

We can do exercise whenever we want.It is good for us to go to school on foot or by bike.In PE claes, we can do all kinds of exercise, such as running , jumping, playing basketball and so on.On weekends, we can climb mountains or go swimming with our friends.Also, we can go hiking during the vacations.

Let’s do exercise and have a healthy lifestyle together!

二、

My Favourite Player

Fu Mingxia is a famous diver.She was born in 1978.When she was four years old, she started diving.Though she was young, she trained very hard and make great progre.At the age of 12, she won her first world diving champion.

Fu Mingxia won her first Olympic gold medal at the Barcelona Olympic 5

Games.In Barcelona, she became China’s youngest Olympic gold medalist when she was 14.Fu Mingxia had the best gift for her fourteenth birthday.She won the Olympic gold medal so she became famous all over the world.

Module 9

一、

the Computer

One of the most important inventions if the computer.It has changed the world and people’s lives.The first computer was as large as a room.Today’s computers have become smaller and smaller.Computers are very useful.First, they can save large amounts of information in their memory chips.Second, computers can work very fast, and they never get tired.Third, more and more machines are built with the help of computers.There are computer clarooms in many schools.Students learn a lot from computers.Students can learn a foreign language on computers.They can also make friends with others around the world on the computer.

二、根据下面提示内容，写一篇有关纸的发明历史的作文。

1.世界上原本没有纸，以前人们不得不在石头或布上写字；

2.中国的蔡伦发明了纸；

3.今天，人们将蔡伦的方法加以改进，制造出了很多其他种类的纸，人们会记住这位发明者。

Many years ago, there was no paper in the world.People had to write on the stones and cloth.It was a waste of time.And it was really difficult.

Then Chinese inventor Cai Lun invented paper.It was not only very convenient but also very useful.Today, people improve the paper that was invented by Cai Lun.And we make a lot of different kinds of paper.

I think it is one of the most helpful inventions in the world.People in the world will forever remember this great inventor—Cai Lun.

Module 10

一、暑假就要到了，假设你们学校的外籍教师Mi Green要到海南岛去度假，她向你（Zhang Ming）了解情况。请你为她写一段简要的介绍，内容包括：

1.海南岛的地理位置、自然条件；

2.告诉她海南岛度假的活动内容:钓鱼、潜水、冲浪、游览亚热带风光等；

3.提示她带上度假必备物品：太阳镜、伞、太阳帽等。Dear Mi Green, A trip to Hainan is the best choice for your summer holiday. Hainan lies in the south of China.Everything is quite different from here in Guangxi.The weather there is often changeable, sunny or rainy.No matter what weather it is, it’s very hot there.You can go fishing, swimming, diving surfing every day.If you want to relax yourself quietly, you can stay on the beach.The beach is very beautiful.

I hope what I have written will be helpful to you.6

Enjoy yourself.

Zhang Ming

Module 11

My Favourite Phote

Hello, everyone! This is my favourite photo.It was taken when I first took part in school table tennis competition.In the picture, I’m getting ready to play.I look very careful.

To tell the truth, I liked playing table tennis, but I was afraid to play in the competition.My friends encouraged me to have a try.At last, I agreed.I practiced so hard for the competition that I won the first prize in the end.From the experience I learn that nothing is impoible if you put your heart into it.

Module 12

一、许多野生动物处于濒临灭绝的危险境地，特别是许多大型动物，出于乱砍滥伐，环境的破坏，使它们的灭绝速度加快。地球是不能没有动植物，人类出为能独存，因此，我们要保护环境，采取措施改变人类的生存状况。

请你以Protect Wild Animals为题，写一篇短文。谈谈我们为什么要保护野生动物，应该采取措施保护野生动物。

Protect Wild Animals

Why should we protect wild animals? Do you know any of endangered animals? Why are they in danger?

I think there are many endangered animals in the world, such as tigers and pandas.When farmers cut down trees, tigers can’t hide or hunt.Many tigers are killed by people who want to sell their fur for money.And there are few places where pandas can live.

We human beings could not live without all the plants and animals around us.So Protecting wild animals is very important.We must take measures to keep plants from being destroyed and stop animals from being killed.If each of us can plant a tree and build a birdhouse, the world will be more beautiful.

7

第18篇：外研版九年级英语下册单词表(打印版)

外研版九年级下册英语单词表

Module 1 airplane

n.飞机

coach

n.长途公共汽车，客车 departure

n.出发；起程；航班；车次 lounge

n.(机场等的)等待室 departure lounge

(机场的)候机厅 transport

n.交通方式；交通 set off

动身，出发

nod

v.点（头）(表示赞成) tearn.

眼泪；泪珠

towards

prep.往；向；朝...的方向 cigarette

n.香烟

though

get off

step

Module 2 geography

physical

PE

really

neither

secondary school

present

absent

speech

biology

safety

fortunately

Spanish

French

involve

training

athletics

society

disco

either...or...

Module 3 debate

illne

prevent

medicine

suppose

relaxed

eldest

married

fall off

get married

couple

diet

lead a ...life

disease

Module 4 dre

fit

conj.虽然；只管 下(火车，公共汽车)

n.步; 步调

n.地理学

a.身体的; 体力的

n.体育 ；体育课

ad.非常；很；实在；确实

pron.二者都不 a.(二者)均无的

中学

a.在场的； 出席的

a.不在的,缺席的

n.演讲;演讲

n.生物学

n.安全

n.毒品

a.西班牙的；西班牙语的 n.西班牙语

a.法国的；法语的 n.法语

vt.牵扯；牵连；影响

n.训练

n.田径运动

n.社团；协会

n.迪斯科舞厅；迪斯科舞会

要不...要不...；不是...而是...

n.辩论

n.病；疾病

vt.防止；预防

n.医学

vt.猜想；假设

a.放松的；松弛的

a.年龄最大的

a.已经婚的；结婚的

(从...)跌落

结婚

n.夫妻

n.日常饮食

过(某种生活)

n.病；疾病 n.连衣裙

v.合适,合身

用心

爱心

专心

glove

n.手套儿 have on

穿戴；戴着 overcoat

n.外套；大衣 scarf

n.围巾；头巾 thick

a.厚的 size

n.尺码；号 shop aistant

n.店员

cool

a.时髦的；酷的 fashionable

a.流行；时髦的； 时尚的 logo

n.标志，商标 well-known

a.众所周知的；著名的

designer

a.由著名设计师设计的 n.设计师

advertising

n.广告

dollar

succeed

show off

personality

Module 5 rule

suggestion

keep to

rope

stream

clear

starving

lead the way

fall asleep

valley

peaceful

site

gesture

stick

reach ou

still

wood

hillside

sudden

blood

damage

cause

effort

fifth

order

in order to

director

smell

discu

Module 6 fever

flu

knee

wound

mi

n.美元

v.成功；做到

显示；炫耀 n.个性；性格

n.观则 ；规章

n.提议

沿着...走

n.绳子

n.小河；溪

a.大白清楚的

a.非常饿的；饥饿难忍的

领路，带路

入睡

n.山谷

a.安静的；平静的

n.场所

n.示意动作；手势

n.枝子；枯枝

伸手去摸

a.静止的；不动的

n.树丛

n.小山坡

a.突然的

n.血

n.&vt.损害

v.造成；引起 n.原因,起因

n.努力

num.第五

n.顺序；命令

vt.号令

为了

n.主任

n.气息

vt.讨论；谈论

n.发烧

n.流行感冒

n.膝盖

n.伤，创口

v.不在

用心爱心

专心2

trip

v.绊；绊倒 improvement

n.改善；改进 oncoming

迎面而来的 couch

n.长沙发 expert

n.专家 require

v.需要 fit

a.健康的 amount

n.数量 weight

n.重量 effect

n.影响 cooker

n.厨灶 shock

n.电击 hit

vt.打；击 glad

breathe

cancer

fix

Module 7 Finger

basket

bread

fork

knife

lemonade

pancake

serve

spoon

hold

hot

roll

Roman

saying

cheers

plate

explanation

cro

generally

over

blind

sense

taste

owner

bee

officer

course

Module 8 Dialogue

line

nurse

recite

role

row

servant

bit

a.高兴的

v.呼吸

n.癌症

vt.修理

n.手指

n.篮子

n.面包

n.（吃食物用的）叉子

n.刀

n.柠檬味汽水；柠檬饮料

n.烙饼；薄饼

vt(为…).端上； (食物和饮料)

勺；匙

vt.举办；召开

a.辣的

n.小圆面包

n.罗马人

n.格言；谚语

int.干杯

n.盘子 n.解释，说明

a.恼怒的；生气的

ad.一般地；通常

ad.结束 a.瞎的

n.感觉官能

n.味道

n.所有权人；主人

n.蜜蜂 n.官员

n.一道菜

n.对话

n.台词 ，对白，线

n.保姆 ；护士

v.背诵

n.角色

n.一排座位

n.仆人

n.一部门，一段

用心爱心

专心3

play the role of

v.扮演...角色 superb

a.极佳的 impreed

adj.印象深刻的 front

a.前边的 nightlife

夜生活

musical

n.音乐剧；音乐电影 in the open air

在露天(或户外) Japanese

a.日本的；日语的；日本人的 n.日语；日本人 industry

n.工业 trade

n.贸易

Module 9 achieve

v.完成；到达 bright

handwriting

level

certain

however

fairly

no matter

wherever

own

everyday

eential

tourism

quarter

industrial

recent

Arabic

typhoon

importance

in place of

Indian

speaker

period

expre

Module10 beat

ceiling

fetch

pardon

raise

forgive

treasure

stay in touch

owe

pay back

kindne

patience

gift

fair

model

role model

value

decision

graduate

a.聪明的

n.书法

n.水平

a.某些；一些

ad.不管多么

ad.相当地

无论…

ad.无论在哪里

v拥有

a.每天的,日常的

a.极其重要的

n旅游业

n.四分之一

a.工业的

a.近来的

n.阿拉伯语

n.台风

n.重要性

代替

n.印度人

n.说某种语言的人；发言者；演讲者

n.阶段；时期

vt.表示，表达

n.强节奏

n.天花板

vt.拿来

int.请再说一遍

v.举起

vt.原谅

vt.珍视；珍爱 保持联系

vt.归因于；归功于

偿还

n.体贴

n.耐心

n.恩赐

a.公平的；公正的

n.模范;典型

楷模，行为榜样

n.行为准则，价值

n.决定

n.毕业生

用心

爱心

专心

v.使震惊

ad.在（或向）里面

prep.在（或向）…里

n奶牛；母牛

n.牙医

n.牙齿

n.机器人 用心

爱心

专心5 shock

inside

cow

dentist

tooth

robot

第19篇：外研版九年级上册英语全册教案

三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Module 1 Wonders of the world Unit 1

What is a wonder of the world? 上课教师 学生年级

教

材

课

时 教

学

设

计 课

型 Listening and speaking 教材分析 This unit aims to review the learnt tenses so far and help students to be able to present some important and creative ideas about writing a school magazine. 教学目标 To learn and understand the topic words through talking and listening.To know something about the pyramids and the Grand Canyon.To understand the conversation about starting a school magazine involving different tenses.知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, event, listen up.That’s news to me.Anyone else? 2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To learn to give ideas on writing a school magazine.过程与方法 1.Top-down approach, enabling Ss to understand and talk about writing a school magazine.2.To learn by listening, speaking and discuing.情感、态度 与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to know more about writing a school magazine of their own.

教学过程

教学步骤 教师活动

学生活动

活动目的

Step 1 Lead-in Start the leon by showing groups of pictures about the wonders of the world on the screen including the ancient pyramids.Ask students to talk about the picture on Page 2.T: Where can you see the pictures and the brief introduction probably? (Newspaper / the Internet / Magazine…)

T: Yes, magazines like Crazy English / National Geography…

Who started…? Learn the new vocabulary.(ancient, pyramid, review, wonder…)

Have a talk about the picture using the words in Activity 1.Learn a bit about magazines.Get the Ss to be attentive and focus on the theme of the leon.(Magazine) Step 2 Listening & Vocabulary Play the tape and check the words.Listen to the tape again.Make up poible questions according to the answers.Give examples.

Listen and check the words.Make up questions according to the given answers.( Wh-questions) Practise listening and get specific information.Check their understanding by making questions.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step 3.

Listen & read Play the tape for the 1st time.Ask Ss questions. T: What are the children doing?

Is there a school magazine in

Da Ming’s school? the 1st time.

Play the tape again and ask students to decide T OR F.① Crazy feet is a band.② Becky Wang started a school magazine.③ Da Ming watched the interview on TV yesterday ④ Tony is writing a composition.

Listen more carefully for the 2nd time.Decide whether they are true or false.Check the answers with the cla.Listen for the specific information and understand the details of the conversation. Step 4. Read Play the tape again and get Ss to practise the conversation.Check the language points. Focus on everyday English and useful expreions.(Listen up, Anyone else? do some review, do an interview, on=about, get better grades) Get Ss to make a list of the articles in magazines.Check the answers in Activity 4.Read the conversation aloud, and read in role.Answer the questions in Activity 4. Practise reading and go over how to give suggestions when in discuion.Learn more about writing a school magazine.

Step 5. Pair work Go through the five questions and highlight the key words.Ask for more answers on Question 3.Ss take turns to answer the questions.Consolidate the key words and transit to the next step by Question 3. Step 6.Discuion Tell the Ss: If your school decides to start a magazine, what are you going to write about? And why? They can make up lists and take Activity 3 as an example.Report their discuion.Work out the lists and talk about their plans to write the magazine.Beginning: Our school will start a magazine.What articles are you going to write...Learn

to Listen to the tape and get the answers.Listen to get a general idea for discu in the way as the children do.Check Ss’ creativity.作业 布置 Collect information about the seven wonders of the world.(Pictures and brief introductions) 板书 设计 Unit 1 What is a wonder of the world?

school magazine

That’s news to me!

a wonder

What’s it about?

ancient pyramids

listen up

write a composition

Any more ideas?/ Anyone else?

do some reviews about…

on=about

do an interview with 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Unit 2

Ｉwas on the edge of the Grand Canyon.

上课教师 学生年级

教

材

课

时 教

学

设

计 课型 教材 分析 Reading and writing By example this unit presents a good way to describe what one sees and feels after a journey.It can help students to know more about the Grand Canyon, and inspire Ss to love and explore the natural wonders. 教学 目标 To get information from the reading material about the Grand Canyon; To learn the way of writing about what you see and your feelings when traveling;

知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: waterfall, stranger, rock, ground, canyon, reply, rise, face, get out of, look over, disappear into, look (acro) to„light-dark, clear, huge, beside, below, at the bottom of, reach the top. „too„to„

2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To love the wonders of the natural world and give facts and opinions.过程方法 1.Interactive approach.2.To improve Ss reading skills and get them to talk and practise writing by imitating.

情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to write a description of a wonder that they have seen or visited.

教学过程

教学步骤 教师活动

学生活动

活动目的

Step 1 Lead-in Ask Ss to show information about the seven natural wonders.(The teacher can get the related pictures ready beforehand) Present words in Activity 1.Talk and give facts about the wonders.Encourage Ss to describe with the words given.Check up Ss’ homework and start the new topic.(Wonders) Step 2.

Ask and answer Ask Ss to make questions about facts of the natural wonders.Demonstrate and get Ss to follow.Ask and answer.How tall/deep… is it? It’s…meters tall/deep.Practise asking about detailed information and learn the sentence pattern.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step 3.

Read (Skimming)

Tell Ss to read the paage in Activity 2.Find out the name of the wonder and its facts.T: Where did the writer visit?

How deep/wide/long is it? Read the paage and answer the questions.Find out the facts and write them down in Activity 5.Practise reading skills and get specific information. Step 4 Read

and match Play the tape and get Ss to follow silently.Find out the main idea of each paragraph.Present the five topic sentences on the screen (Bb).A.The writer arrived there on the rainy

morning; B.The first impreion/sight of the

Grand Canyon.C.The Grand Canyon is the greatest

wonder in his opinion.D.Details about the Grand Canyon.E.After minutes’ walk, he came to it.Ss follow the lines and match the topic sentences to the paragraphs.(or they can conclude the main idea by themselves if poible) Read for the main idea of each paragraph.Learn to sum up and help to understand the whole paage. Step 5 Read aloud Get Ss to read aloud after the tape and find the details about the trip.① When did he get to the Grand

Canyon? ② Why was there nothing to see? ③ Where was he facing on the edge of

the Grand Canyon? ④ How did he feel about the Canyon? Read aloud and answer questions in Activity 3.Ask for help if they have any problems. Practise reading and learn about the details, check their understanding. Step 6.

Focus Now get Ss’ attention to those phrasal verbs and prepositional phrases.Try to check by a gap-filling exercise.(get out of, go through, look over, fall away, on the edge of, look down/acro to, at the bottom of, 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

disappear into, ask oneself ) Learn the verbs and phrases.Practising using them with the help of the gap-filling.Focus on the phrasal verbs and prepositions.

Step 7. Match Activity 4 Ask Ss to find these words in the paage and gue their meaning within the sentence.Underline the words and match the English meaning. Practise gueing the meaning of words in the context. Step 8.Writing Tell Ss to imagine they have seen (some of them did see) one of the wonders of the world.Write sentences describing how they felt.Remind them of the four keywords: saw, size, happened, felt.

First get them to work in pairs and then report the sentences or paage if poible.

Write sentences according to the given beginning.Report their answers and try to make them

into a paage.Practise writing and using the language on the basis of imaging and personal experience.作业 布置 Finish writing the description of one of the wonders of the world, trying to collect some details and take the text as a model.板书 设计 Unit 2 I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon The seven natural wonders of the world How tall/wide/deep is it? It’s…tall/wide/tall.

get out of

on the edge of

ask oneself go through

look down/acro to

huge=very very big look over

at the bottom of

the greatest wonder fall away

disappear into

Unit 3 Language in use

上课教师

学生年级 教

材

课

时

教

学

设

计 课型 Revision and application 教材 分析 This unit serves to give a review and summary towards the language points learnt in U1&.2.

And it helps to clarify the exact differences among tenses.教学 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

目标 To review and check the words learned in this module; To summarise and consolidate tenses learnt before; 知识 与 能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: height, lift, view, attract, description, location, design

2.To enable the Ss to differ the tenses learned in situations.3.To make a poster of a wonder of the world/ one’s hometown.过程

方法 1.Formal and interactive practice, task-based.2.Comprehensive ways of practising and consolidating.情感、态度与

价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world; To make a poster of a wonder of the world or his hometown and help to love one’s motherland. 教学步骤 教师活动 学生活动 活动目的

教学过程

Step 1 Revision Ask Ss to watch and listen to the MV Chinese by Andy Lau.Get them to find out the wonder in it.

Encourage Ss to describe what they see in it , e.g. The Great Wall is a great wonder. Andy Lau went to the Great Wall. He was singing on it. He has sung many popular songs. … Watch and talk about things appear in the MV.Learn to tell the differences among the tenses.Help to establish the concepts of tenses in situations. Step 2.

Grammar focus 1.Read through the sentences in the box with the whole cla.Call back ideas about the structure highlighted from the students.2.Give hand-out to Ss and ask them to match the exact meaning with the corresponding sentence.(Activity 1) Check the answers right after that.1.Read aloud the seven sentences.And tell the making-up of each tense.2.Read through the 5 pairs of sentences in different tenses and match.Practise telling the differences and meanings. Step 3. Writing

1.Go back to the picture of the Great Wall.Give examples by matching the three parts.The Great Wall + is + about 6,700 km long. Give Ss tips on how to decide.2.Encourage Ss to observe and decide the forms of verbs in different tenses. 1.Observe the 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

subjects and the adverbial or even the phrasal verbs.Match the three parts to make poible sentences.2.Read through the uncompleted paage and try to give the correct forms of verbs in the situations. Learn to observe and practise language in different tenses. Step 4 Speaking 1.Show up the photo of visiting the Great Wall.Get Ss to ask the teacher questions in Activity 4.(Example) Get Ss to work in pairs, and ask and answer the questions.2.Present wonders in the local area. Get Ss to talk about them.1.Ss follow the teacher and make up their own conversations.

Perform in front of the cla.2.Learn the example in Activity 5 and make a similar introduction to the wonders in local area.Practise speaking and enable Ss to use the language and understand its meaning.

Step 5 Vocabulary Game Present nine pictures about wonders of the world, each of which links an exercise in Activity 6/8.Get Ss to finish them first and check in forms of game.Elaborate on the Pyramids in Egypt.(More related photos)

Finish the multiple- choices exercises and choose the pictures they’re interested in to check the answers. With the help of games, Ss can review the phrasal verbs and concepts of tenses. Step 6.

Listening Present the three photos in Activity 7 Ask about facts about any one of them.Play the tape for Ss to learn more.

Listen and match the notes with the photos.Check the answers after listening and report about the three wonders with the help of the table. Learn more about the three wonders, practising describing. Step 7.

Around the world Get Ss to look at the picture and read silently through the introduction.Give questions to check their understanding. Read and decide, trying to grasp the main information.Learn about another wonder of the world. Step 8.Module task Tell Ss to work in groups of 4.Read through the instructions.Help them to decide what to write about.Hold up a show-and-tell seion where Ss can display and discu.Work in groups of 4 and write about one wonder they like.Collect sufficient information and make the poster.Take part in the show-and-tell seion.

Take this task as an extensive learning activity to get Ss to learn more about the wonders.作业 布置 Finish off the poster after cla and get ready for the show at the back wall of the claroom.Prepare the show-and-tell seion in groups of four.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

板书 设计 Unit 3 Language in use

Structures of different tenses

ancient

The Great Wall is a wonder…

modern

wonders

Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.

natural

He was singing on it

height—What’s the height of…?

We are listening to him now.

on the journey of…

He has sung many pop songs.

because / because of He will visit it some other day.

Module 2 Great books

一、教学内容分析

本模块的话题是谈论书、作家、思想家、戏剧、电影、诗歌等。语法是一般现在时被动语态。

二、学情分析 谈论书、作家、思想家等是学生感兴趣的话题。本模块的学习是通过该话题的讨论，学习并掌握一般现在时被动语态的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句和特殊疑问句。

三、教学目标

1、语言知识目标: ● 功能：谈论书、作家、思想家等。

● 词汇：1）能正确使用下列单词：work,influence,respect,wise,literature, behaviour,cave,freedom,funeral,social,theme,treasure,clever,dead,

pleased, alive, southern, state.

2) 理解下列单词：thinker, monthly, outsider, version, historical,

editor, publisher, reviewer.

3）能准确理解并使用下列词组；as far as,not„any more,millions of,

run away, grow up, talk about, be known as/for ● 语法：一般现在时被动语态。

2、语言技能目标

听：通过听进行单词和图片的配对。

说：谈论最喜欢的书、戏剧、诗歌和作家等。

读：能读懂对书、作家、思想家等作介绍的文章，能掌握从文章到表格 的信息转移。

写：写一本自己最喜欢的书。

3、情感目标：培养学生阅读的习惯，提高个人文化修养。

4、文化意识目标：了解中外著名的作家、思想家、诗人及他们的作品。三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

四、教学重点、难点

重点：key vocabulary___work, influence,wise,clever,behaviour,dead,alive,treasure

theme, southern,as far as,not…any more,millions of,run away,grow up,talk

about, be known as/for 难点：被动语态的构成和用法，主动语态如何改为被动语态。

五、课时安排 第一课时：Unit 1 第二课时；Unit 2 第三课时：Unit 3 第

四、五课时：Review and workbook

Unit 1 Confucius’ works are read by many people Teaching aims :Learn the use of present simple paive.Key points: work, influence, thought, wise, copy, as far as, not…any more, millions of, be known as/for Difficult sentences: Shakespeare’s works are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain was an important writer, but he isn’t known as a great thinker like Confucius.

Step 1 Warming up& leading in 1.Ask the students some questions.Do you like reading books? What’s your favourite book？Who’s your favourite writer?

2.Show three pictures about Confucius, Shakespeare and Mark Twain.Let them gue who they are.Can you say something about them? Teach the words : work, influence, play, poem, respect, thinker, thought, wise, writer.Confucius: He was a great thinker in China.He is known for his wise thought.We are

still influenced by his thought.He is respected by us.Shakespeare: He was a writer of plays and poems.Some of his most famous plays are Hamlet and Romeo and Juliet.He was born in 1564 in England.His plays are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain: He was a famous American writer.He wrote a lot of stories.His books are still popular.For example ,The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.3.Do Activity 5.Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words.Step 2 Listening (Act.1&2) 1.First read the words in the box .Then match the words in the box with the people in the pictures.(Act.1) 2.Listen and check your answer to Act.1.(Act.2) step 3 Listening and reading(Act.3、4) 1.Listen and answer .Where are the speakers? What are they talking about? 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

2 .Read and answer the questions.(Act.4) 3.Everyday English and language points. What’s up? Go on! Sounds like a good idea.as far as, not …any more, millions of ,be known as/for 4.Read the conversation in two groups.Step 4 Grammar practice 1.Underline the sentences in the conversation that have the pattern of paive voice.2.Read the sentences aloud.3.Do WB Exercise 1 on p116 Step 5 Speaking and writing 1.Do Act.8 Work in groups of three and look at the opinions in the table.Report ideas of your group to the whole cla.2.Do Act.6 Talk about your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.Homework 1.write your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.2.Listen and read the conversation.

3.Search the internet about the book called The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.

Unit 2 It’s still read and loved

Teaching aims practice reading skills.Try to write a paage about your favourite great book.Key points run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death Difficult sentences 1.The themes of the story are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious 2.It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.

Step 1 Warming up & leading in 1.Read the conversation you learned yesterday with your partner.Then answer the questions according to the conversation.What did Betty suggest at the end of the conversation in Unit 1? What’s Mr.Jackson’s favourite book?

2.Ask the students if they have read the book before.What happens in the book? What are the main ideas of the book? Show some pictures of the book and tell the story..

Teach the new words: behaviour, cave,freedom,funeral,outsider,pretty,social,theme,

treasure, nineteen century Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage quickly and answer the questions.Where can you read the paage? Why does Mr.Jackson like the book? 2.Read the paage again and complete the table with the information about it.(Act.3) 3.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4) Step 3 Read aloud and language points

1.Play the tape for the students to listen and read.2.Get the students to read each paragraph and discu the useful words and expreions.

run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death

It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 4 Writing 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

1.Work in pairs .Would you like to read The Adventures of Tom Sawyer ? Why/ Why not? 2.Think of your favourite great book you have read .Complete the table in Act.3 3.Write a paage about your favourite great book .

My favourite great book is Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone by J.K.Rowling.It’s a story about a young boy… Home work 1.Listen to the tape and practice reading the paage aloud.2.Write a paage about your favourite great book.

Unit 3 Language in use Teaching aims Language practice Key points Seeing a play is more interesting than seeing a film.First…then…,next…,after that…,finally… Difficult points The use of paive voice.

Step1 Revision 1.Read the paage in Unit 2 2.Show the paage about your favourite great book.Step 2 Vocabulary (Act.5&8) 1.Read through the words or phrases in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask the students to complete the paages, then check them.Step 3 Grammar 1.Ask the students to read the sentences in the box.2.Grammar teaching The teacher helps students understand the paive voice 1) 被动语态的构成：be +过去分词

时态在be 体现：am /is /are +done, was / were + done, have/has been +done 被动语态的句型：

肯定句：主语+be +过去分词+（by ~）

否定句：主语+be not +过去分词+（by ~） 一般疑问句：Be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）

特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+ be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）

2) 被动语态的用法：

I.要表达“被„”、”受„”、“遭„”、“让„”之类的语义。如： 教师很受尊敬—The teachers are well respected.

II.强调动作承受者。如：

他远近闻名—He is known far and wide.

III.不知道或没有必要指出动作的执行者。如：

房子每天都有人打扫__The room is cleaned every day.3) 主动语态如何改为被动语态：

Children

love

these songs

主动语态 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

These songs

are loved

by children

被动语态 3．Practice Do Act.1,2,3,4 and WB P117 Ex.4&5 Step 4 Listening and speaking(Act.6&7) 1.Ask the students to go through the table.2.Listen and check the statements about Betty and Daming agree with.3.Work in pairs .Ask and say which statements you agree with, and why._ __Do you think that modern books are great books? __Yes, I do .I think …/No, I don’t .I think…

Step 5 Reading

Read ―Around the world ‖ on P17 and answer the questions.

When and where did Plato live? What was he? Where did he travel? What did he do when he returned to Athens? What are his works called? Step 6 Module task Discuion: Are we more influenced by films than by books? 1.Decide on your point of view.2.Think of some examples of films or books you have seen or read.How did they influence you? Homework: 1.Do Ex.2&3 on WB P116 2.Revise Module 2

Review of Module 7 and workbook Step 1 Revision 1.Revise the words and expreions you learned in the module.2.Do self-aement on P119.3.Do Ex 6,7,8 to check their vocabulary.Step 2 Listening and pronunciation.1.Listen and check the true sentences.(Ex 9 on P118) 2.Listen and repeat .(Ex 10 on P118) Step 3 Reading 1.Read and answer the questions.(Ex 11 on P118) 2.Listen and read it again.Let the students ask more questions about Dickens.Then answer them.Step 4 Grammar 1.Check Ex 2&3 on P116 to revise the paive voice.2.Do some more exercises about it.

Module 3 Sporting life

一、教材内容分析：

本模块以体育运动及奥运会为话题，通过谈论BIG与HAS间的前一次和下一次篮球比三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

赛（Unit 1），介绍刘翔的成长历程（Unit 2）及奥运会（Unit 3）展开教学。要求掌握一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态；学习与体育运动相关的词汇及日常用语等。通过学习，放眼时事，体会体育明星光环背后所付出的勤奋与努力。

二、学情分析：

本模块围绕篮球等体育运动及奥运会而展开，又正直北京奥运会倒计时之际。相信学生对此内容会颇感兴趣。同时介绍了刘翔的成长历程，联系现实，阐明体育竞技的伟大及体育训练的艰辛，努力是将来成功的基石。

被动语态共分三个模块讲授，本模块第二次涉及这一内容，可谓承上启下。要求学生在熟练运用各种时态的基础上，将时态与语态相结合，需反复操练。在巩固一般现在时的被动语态的基础上学习一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态，并为学习现在完成时和情态动词的被动语态作好铺垫。

三、教学目标:

语言知识目标: (1)词汇：allow/defeat/stand for/against/tough/encourage/medal/record/set up/ first of all/represent/advertisement/coach/regularly/race (2)日常用语：You’ve got no chance!/What do you reckon?/Don’t let them get to you!/Nice work! (3)语法：一般过去时与一般将来时的被动语态。

(4)话题：讨论有关体育运动与奥运会的话题以及体育明星的成长历程。

语言技能目标：

听：通过对话与课文等的听力训练，理解简单的体育运动信息。

说：通过对文本等的学习，辅以问答及讨论等形式反复操练，学会简单讲述某名人的成长历程。

读：提高阅读能力，掌握文本精髓。

写：作一份关于班级内同学参加体育运动或观看体育比赛的调查报告。写一篇关于体育明星成长历程的简单报道。 情感态度目标：

通过学习，加强团队合作精神的培养，调动学生良性竞争的意识及英语学习的积极性。了解有关体育运动和竞技比赛的要素；了解奥运会特别是即将举行的北京2008年奥运会的相关信息；了解当代体育明星成功的奋斗历程，用理性的思维体会成功背后的艰辛与努力，指导青少年学生的个人成长。

四、教学重点及难点：

(一)掌握与体育运动等相关的词汇、句型及日常用语。

(二)掌握一般过去时与一般将来时被动语态的运用。通过各种题型的反复操练，掌握其与一般现在时的被动语态的不同用法。

(三)简单撰写某体育明星的一段成长经历或成功史。

五、课时安排： Period 1: Unit 1 Period 2: Unit 1-2 Period 3: Unit 2 Period 4: Unit 3 Period 5: Unit 3 Unit 1 When will the match be held? ⅠTeaching model Listening and speaking 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

ⅡTeaching method Communicative approach ⅢTeaching aims Key words: allow, defeat, train, tough, chance, reckon, mad Key Phrases: stand for, get to Everyday English: a tough match You’ve got no chance! What do you reckon? Don’t let them get to you!

Nice work! ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, pictures, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step1 Warming-up and listening

1.Look at the pictures and talk something about sports.2.Look at the photos and describe them.You can use some of the words in the box to help you. 3.Listen and check the words you hear in Activity 2.Step 2 Listen and read 1.Listen to the tape carefully.

2.Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.3.Play the tape and have them read and follow.4.Act it out.5.Learn Everyday English.Step 3 Do Exercises 1.Complete the table in Activity 4.2.Listen again and check.3.Complete the sentences in Activity 5.Step 4 Work in pairs

Read the sentences from the conversation.Say who the underlined words refer to in Activity 6.Step 5 Explain the important and difficult points

Don’t let them get to you, Tony! 不要让他们影响你,托尼!

get to sb.意思是to make someone feel upset or angry,即"让某人感到烦恼,困扰"。如: The heat was beginning to get to me so I went indoors.天气很热,让我开始感到烦躁,所以我回到了屋内。

The smell of her old book really gets to me after a while! 过了一会儿,她的旧书散发出的气味实在让我不舒服。

Step 6 Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.Make sure you pause between each sense group in Activity 7.2.Say the sentence in Activity 8.3.Work in pairs.Talk about your favourite sports team or sports star this season.Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.1, 2, 3, 4&5.Unit 2 Liu Xiang was trained for gold.ⅠTeaching model Reading and writing ⅡTeaching method Bottom-up approach ⅢTeaching aims 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Key vocabulary : encourage , medal , set , set up , yearbook , represent , advertisement , coach , sportsman , overnight , skill , hurdling , sportswoman , race Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids OHP, tape recorder ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Warming-up 1.Gueing game: The Chinese champions in the Olympic Games.2.Talk something about Liu Xiang.3.Show some pictures .Look at the pictures and the title of the paage.Say what you know about Liu Xiang and how he became a sporting hero. 4.Introduce the new words.Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage in Activity 2.2.Play the tape and have them read and follow.3.Read the paage again.Step 3 Do exercises 1.Read the paage and choose the sentence which best exprees the main idea.Liu Xiang____.a) was helped by his sports school to become a gold medal winner b)will be encouraged to be a star and not a sporting hero c) has trained for many years , and will continue to win medals 2.Complete the time line with the notes in Activity 3.3.Answer the questions in Activity 4.

1) As a symbol, what does Liu Xiang represent? 2) Why isn’t Liu Xiang an overnight succe? 3) What was Liu Xiang advised to do in 1998? 4) What was the special programme set up in 2001? 5) What will he be encouraged to do in the future? Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points

1.And now that he's well known all over the world, Liu Xiang will also be asked to appear in advertisements and films, and even to record music.

现在由于刘翔已经世界闻名了,他还会被邀请做广告,拍电影,甚至录唱片。

now that 常常用为一种新的情况或状况做出解释,表示"既然；由于"。如: Now that Mr Liu has arrived , we can begin our meeting.既然刘先生已经到了,我们就开会吧。 2.Liu was encouraged at first to train as a high jumper.起初,教练支持刘翔练跳高。

encourage sb.to do sth.表示"鼓励某人做某事"。在本句中,encourage一词用于被动语态,表示刘翔是"被鼓励"去某事,而不是他"鼓励"别的人去做某事。如: Ms Wang always encourages us to speak English in cla.王老师总是鼓励我们课

上讲英语。

We were encouraged to learn foreign languages at school.学校鼓励我们学习外语。 3.It was set up in 2001 to help young sportsmen and sportswomen.它(特殊项目)建立于2001年,用来帮助年轻运动员。

set up表示"建立,设立;创办(组织,企业);制定(计划等)如:

She plans to set up her own busine.她计划企业办自己的企业。 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

We need to set a meeting to discu the plan.我们需要开个会来讨论这个计划。 4.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态

英语的语态是通过动词形式的变化表现出来的。英语中有两种语态：主动语 态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。例如： Many people speak Chinese.谓语：speak的动作是由主语many people来执行的。

被动语态表示主语是动作的接受者，即行为动作的对象。例如： Chinese is spoken by many people.主语Chinese是动词speak的接受者。 1)一般过去时的被动语态构成： was/were＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.Liu Xiang’s races were recorded. 2)一般将来的被动语态构成： shall/will be＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang will be encouraged to go for more medals for China.Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport? 5.Learning to learn Step 5 Writing 1.Rewrite the notes in Activity 3 in full sentences. 2.Look at the sentences in Activity 6. A special programme helped Liu Xiang.

Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.

His skill at hurdling was noticed by his coach Sun Haiping. His coach Sun Haiping noticed his skill at hurdling. 3.Write sentences about Zhang Yining's training.

4.Join the sentences you wrote in Activity 6 to write a paragraph about Zhang Yining .Use and, although and because. Step6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.6, 7, 8&9.Unit 3 Language in use ⅠTeaching model Revision and application ⅡTeaching method

Formal and interactive practice ⅢTeaching aims 1.Key vocabulary: finishing line, award, marathon, Italian, turn, so far, champion, taekwondo, belt

2.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Revision Review the text of Unit 2 Step 2 Language practice 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Grammar : 小结一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 Step 3 Work in pairs.

1.Ask and answer the questions in Activity 1.2.Complete the paage with the correct form of the words in Activity 2.3.Look at the pictures and put them in the correct order in Activity 3.Step 4 Do exercises 1.Complete the conversation with the correct form of the words in the box in Activity 4. 2.Choose the best answer in Activity 5. 3.Listening:

1) Listen and check the true statements in Activity 6.2) Listen again and choose the correct answer in Activity 7.4.Put the sentences in the correct order to complete the conversation in Activity 8.Step 5 Around the world: The Paralympics Games Step 6 Module task: Module task: Making a cla sports survey

1.Work in groups.Write questions to find out about the sport people like to watch and do.

* What sports do you like?

* How often...?

* Do you like to...or...? 2.Carry out your survey.

* Ask as many students as you can to answer your questions. 3.Write the results of your survey.

1) Say how many students you asked the questions were.

We asked...student ―What...?‖

2) Compare their answers.

… students said ...and ...students said ... Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.10, 11, 12&13.

Module 4 Great inventions

Unit 1 Paper and printing have been used for ages 教 学 目 标

德育目标:To know something about the history of paper inventing 知识目标:To get information about the history of paper inventing from the conversation 能力目标:To talk about the advantages of some inventions To practise the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense and modal verbs. 重点 Vocabulary advantage, battery , borrow , camera, charge lend look after, online, photo, promise, same, turn off, turn on 难点

the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense, and modal verbs. 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

课型

Listening and speaking 教法

PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step one: Revision 1)Talk about some great invention, recall the words of inventions: TV, computer, watch, radios, camera, digital camera, photo, mobile phone, internet.Teach: online magazine 2) Recall what we have learned in the last Module Step two: Listening and vocabulary

1.Talking: What's the advantage of an online magazine 2.Listen and check the words

3.Listen and read ⑴ Play the tape to let the Students get the answer: Can the digital camera be borrowed from Tony's Dad

⑵Do Activity 4.Get the students to show their answers.⑶Listen and repeat.Notes:Everyday English Can I ask a favour 帮忙,赏光 Anyway„谈点别的,另外 Here it is.给你,在这儿 It doesn't matter.没关系

I'll see to that.我会处理的.Is that clear 清楚吗 懂了吗 Promise! 我一定! language Points

1) Paper and printing have been used for ages.for ages ---- for (many) years好多年了.类似短语: for hours/ days/months 等.2) The battery hasn't been charged for a couple of months.a couple of --- several 几个

3) I'll see to it.我来处理.see to sb./ sth.= look after, deal with "处理, 照顾, 关照" 4.) You must promise that it won't be….

promise to do/ that..= make a promise to do/that 答应, 许诺作某事 Promise!= I promise to do that.我答应! 5) turn on ----打开 turn off ----关闭 turn up -----开大 turn down ---关小

eg.Don't forget to ___________the light when you leave the room.Please ___________the TV, the football is beginning.

Would you please ________it ______ a little I can't hear it clearly.The baby is sleeping.Please _____________ the radio a little.

4.Read the summary of the conversation.Underline the wrong information 5.Answer the questions Ask Ss to say their answers and check them together.6.Find the sentences in the conversation which mean Grammar Points

Will (won't_) + be +动词的过去分词为一般将来时的被动语态 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

have/has (not) been + 动词的过去分词为现在完成时的被动语态 情态动词+ be + 动词的过去分词为情态动词的被动语态 Summary: 各种时态的被动语态构成 一般现在时:S+ am/is /are + done 一般过去时:S+ was/were + done 一般将来时:S+ will + be + done

情态动词:S+can/may/must/should+be+done 现在进行时: S+ am/ is/ are + being+ done 过去进行时: S+ was/were + being+ done 现在完成时:S+ have/has + been+ done Pronunciation and Speaking Listen to the sentences and repeat.Homework: Finish work book 1-3 附加练习: 中英互译: I'll see to that._______________ 帮个忙________________ Promise.________________ 照相________________ look after________________ 好几个________________ turn off________________ 几年________________ Here it is.________________ 由„.代替________________ 改为被动语态句子

1.They have published two iues of this magazine.2.Betty has kept my watch for two days.3.I'll charge the battery for your MP3 players.4.I could not find my bag anywhere. 课题

Module 4 Great Inventions

Unit 2 Books could be produced more quickly and cheaply.教 学 目 标

德育目标:To research science and love science 知识目标: To understand paages involving present perfect perfect tense 能力目标:To learn a reading skill ----- Scanning To know the history about paper inventing 重点

Vocabulary Create, produce, ink, against, knowledge, spread, introduction, receive, 难点

Phrase:made of, at a time, by hand, at the beginning of, in a way, rather than, one day 课型

Reading and writing 教法

PWP approach Teaching Procedures: 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step I: Revision Have/has been + done This book/ discu/ on telephone It/ buy/by thousands of people Children/tell to read this book The book/ print/ again and again Other books /write /about this book Must/can/may be done 1.a) All students must read this book.

b) This book _____________by all students.2.a) Everyone can understand his ideas.b) His ideas ________________by everyone.3.a)I could not fine her books anywhere.b) Her books ________________anywhere.4.a) For a long time, many people could not use computers.b) Computers__________________by many 5.a) We can do the work now if you want.b) The work _____________now if you want.6.a) You must not take these magazines from the library.b) These magazines _________________from the library .Reading and vocabulary 1.Talk in pairs What are the advantages of both book and computers Can books be replaced by computers

2.Read and get the main ideas of the paragraphs P1 c.Life on paper and in print P2 a.The world before books P3.b.The invention of printing P4.d.Technology and books

P5.e.Can books be replaced by computers Language Points

1.looks through 浏览,温习2.with– without 带有„ / 没有„

3.be made of ---- be made from--- be made up of --- be made in------ be made by— be made into –-- 4.write words on-- make a book -- in those days -- at a time -- by hand --- as a result ---- 5.put„ against 将„放进/刻进 hold„ against 将„贴到

6.at the beginning of 在„初/ 开始时 7.after that 然后,之后 in a way 以„方式

8.compare„.with„.与„.相比 , 与„.相媲美

9.rather than 胜过,而不愿 prefer to do„ rather than do„ 情愿„而不.. be replaced by 被„.所替代 be read online 在网上阅读

3.Make notes to complete the timeline.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

4.Answer the questions 1.Why were books expensive and rare before the invention of printing 2.Why did ideas spread more quickly when books became cheaper 3.What can we use instead of books to get information Homework

Finish the workbook exercises 课题

Module 4 Great Inventions Unit 3 Language practice 教学目标

德育目标:To know about some great inventions 知识目标: To practice the use of paive voice 能力目标:To complete a task about "How to improve inventions" 重点

被动语态: 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时—— have/has +been+动词的过去分词 难点

情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时—— have/has +been+动词的过去分词 课型

Revision and application 教法

Formal and interactive practices Part I: Revision Language practice 现在完成时的被动语态: have/has(not) been +过去分词 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 Conclusion

被动语态的构成:be +动词的过去分词

一般现在时—— am/is / are +动词的过去分词

一般过去时—— was/were +动词的过去分词

情态动词—— aux.v.(must/can/could/may„)+ be +动词的过去分词 现在进行时—— be(am,is,are)+being +动词的过去分词 一般将来时—— will be/be going to be +动词的过去分词 现在完成时—— have/has +been+动词的过去分词 主动语态改成被动语态的步骤及注意事项 1.主动语态的宾语改成被动语态的主语.2.主动语态的谓语动词改成被动语态的谓语动词.do----be done 3.注意保持时态和人称的一致.

4.带双宾的谓语动词有两种改法.当把直接宾语改成主语时,谓语动词后必须加适当的介词: to / for.如:give-- be given to 此类动词还有:pa show send„

再如:buy--- be bought for此类动词还有:make draw cook mend„

5.一些动词不定式在主动语态中省略to作宾语补足语,改成被动语态时,to必须还原.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

注:1.不及物动词(vi.)不用被动语态.如:happen,take place ,appear disappear„没有被动形式.**几种特殊结构

1.My uncle gave me a gift on my birthday.---- I was given a gift on my birthday.A gift was given to me on my birthday.2.We often hear him play the guitar.He is often heard to play the guitar 注意:see, watch, hear, notice, feel, make, listen to, look at等动词/短语后作宾语补语的不定式都不带to;但改成被动语态后必须带to.Part II: Language Practice Read though the sentences with the students and talk about the highlighted structures.

Exercises: Activities 1~8 Finish the exx with the students according to the highlighted words of every activity.Check the answers.Homework: Finish off the workbook exercises

Module 5 Museums

The Teaching Plan for Unit1 You mustn't touch it! Topic You mustn't touch it! Type of leon New leon Period(s) Two

Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: To know something about the signs around you and obey the rules.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests and better attitude to learn English.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: To talk about the signs with "mustn't, can't, Don't… No…." And Word Formation --Compound words Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the signs Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

&

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: 1.The new words and phrases.2.The listening material of Activity 3.Special Strategies: 1.Give some time to the students to remember the new words.2.Talk something related with listening material before listening.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching

Procedure Step1: Greeting and revision have/has been + 过去分词; 情态动词+be+过去分词 Step2: Talking: The signs around you (draw some pictures on the blackboard about sighs, ask students to gue) Step3: Listening and vocabulary 1.Match the pictures with the phrases 2.Listen and underline the correct word in each sentence 1) Read the words together and try to understand their meanings.2) Listen and check.3.Listen and read 1) Close the book and listen to the tape, then answer the question: What are they doing 2) Check the answer and listen again then finish part 5.3) Ask some students to check the answers.4) Listen and repeat.Language points: 1) look forward to 与pay attention to 中的to都是介词,后面应跟名词,代词或动名词,如: I'm looking forward to meeting you.You must pay attention to the spelling in your writing.2) Hang on a minute! 等一下! 3) on one's own 单独的 4) take a photo 拍张照片

5) against 反对 be against doing sth.反对做某事

6) 几种表示禁止的表达方式: Don't+动词原形 No+名词/动名词 can't mustn't be not allowed to 7) No, you can't take a photo, either.Either在此用作副词,要与否定词连用,意思是"也不".如, I don't like coffee either.我也不喜欢咖啡.Step 4: Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.2.Pairwork: Talk about the rules you can or can't do in libraries or museums.Homework 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Copy the new words and recite the useful phrases.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 完成句子.1.禁止喧哗,它违反规定.No shouting! It's against the rules.2.好,让我们下楼吧! Well, let's go downstairs.3.不要碰,禁止你碰它.Don't touch! You mustn't touch it.4.不,你也不能拍照.No, you can't take a photo, either.5.赶快!否则我们将迟到了.Hurry up, or we'll be late for school.Self- reflection The Teaching Plan for Unit2 There's no shouting and no running.Designed by: Yang Lijian Date: Sep.29 Topic Type of leon New leon Period(s) Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.To know something about the Science Museum in London.2.Useful important phrases.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests about the Science Museum.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To get information about the Science Museum in London. 2.To understand paages involving Compound word.Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Phrases and Compound word.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the new words.Personal adjustment Teaching 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

procedure Teaching Procedure Step1 Revision

Use "mustn't, can't, Don't No." to make more sentences about the rules for museums or libraries.(Tips: game or competition.) Step2 Reading and vocabulary 1.Read the words and talk about the pictures.2.Read the paage and answer the questions.3.Check the answers and listen to the tape.4.Complete the table and check 5.Language points: 1) allow doing sth.允许做某事.如, They don't allow smoking in the museum.他们不允许在博物馆吸烟.allow sb.to do sth.允许某人做某事.如, My parents don't allow me to read in the bed.我父母不允许我躺在床上看书.be allowed to do sth.被允许做某事.如, Students are not allowed to smoke.学生们不准吸烟.2) work out 计算出 3) try out 检验,试用

4) fill„with„ 用......填充......She filled the bottle with water.她用水装满了瓶子.区别:be filled with 表示"充满",强调动作; be full of 表示"装满,盛满",表示状态.Hs heart was filled with gratitude.他内心充满了感激之情.The basket was full of flowers.篮子里盛满了花.5) compare„with 与......作比较

6) drop in 顺便走访,也可用于drop in on sb.顺便走访某人.7) Above all "首先,最重要的是" 8) as long as so/as+adj./adv.+as 像......一样

Step 3 Writing Complete the paage then check the answers.Homework

Finish the workbook exercises.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 单项选择.1.A: Hellow! Would you like to go to the cinema with me tonight B: I'm sorry, I can't.Father won't B me to go out in the evening.A.let B.allow C.offer D.help 2.We won't allow C n museum.But you are allowed _____ in the rest room.A.smoking; smoking B.smoke; smoking C.smoking; to smoke D.to smoke; to smoke 3.Be careful! The bowl C hot water.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

A.full of B.fill with C.is filled with D.is fulled of Self- reflection The Teaching Plan for Module5/Unit3 Language in use Topic Type of leon Revision Period(s) Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.Master the key words and structure.2.To practice the use of Compound word.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: Talk about you can or can't do something Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To talk about the rules with "mustn't, can't, Don't… No…." Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard.Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Use the structure "allow or not allow doing sth." To explain the rules.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the structures.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step 1: Revision 1.Finish part 1 and 2.2.Check the answers and read the sentences in language practice.3.Review:

1)No+v.-ing! 如: No smoking! 不许吸烟! No joking! 不要开玩笑! 2)祈使句 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示"禁止".如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.Don't make any noise.不要吵闹.3) You mustn't…

情态动词mustn't 可以表达"禁止"的概念.如: You mustn't take photographs of the exhibits in museums.博物馆中不得给展品拍照.You mustn't tell it to anyone.你决不可以告诉任何人.4)You can't…

can't 可以表示"能力","可能性",也可以表示"不允许".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.如: In most museums you can't make any noise.在大多数博物馆里不能吵闹.5) You aren't allowed to…

本句型用来制止对方做某事.如: You are not allowed to touch the exhibits.不要触摸展品.Step 2 Finish the all exercises then check it.Step 3 Compound words (见书本P179) Exercises: Make new words using the words in Box A and Box B.A

bed cla down home post up wet B card room site stairs work mate load sick Homework Finish off the workbook exercises Review the language points in this module.Blackboard Writing Design 1)No+v.-ing! 2)祈使句

否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示"禁止".如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.3) You mustn't… 4)You can't…

can't 可以表示"能力","可能性",也可以表示"不允许".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.5) You aren't allowed to… Self- reflection

Module 6 Save our world 教案设计 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

一、教材内容分析

本模块以杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球为话题，让学生在了解地球危机重重的基础上，通过活动，考虑我们学生应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识。讨论话题源于周围环境，贴近生活，便于开展活动。教学中应结合学生实际情况，灵活调整教学内容，合理设置课时。适当进行拓展，以丰富学生知识，拓展学生视野，进行理想、人生责任的教育。

二、学情分析

通过两年的学习，学生已能用英语熟练地表达自己的看法和意见。本模块的话题是环境、资源，这是学生很熟悉也较感兴趣的话题, 但同时对学生的知识储备要求较高。首先要求学生通过多种途径了解地球环境、资源的现状。其次在教师预设的任务中，要使学生有话可说，但是这个话题涉及较多的知识，学生掌握的难度较大, 如果材料处理不当，会导致学生有话想说，却无法用英语表达的尴尬场面。因此在具体安排教学内容时，可由简到难，适当降低难度与要求，让学生更好地运用课本知识，达到提高综合运用语言能力的目的。

三、教学目标

1.语言知识目标 词汇 waste、energy、pollution、recvcle、reusable、reduce、reuse、repair、environmental、hopele、neceary、plastic、sort、harm、material 词组句型 instead of、do harm to、make a difference to、It’s+adj+to、stop from 语法 前缀、后缀构词法 功能 话题 表达如何杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球

以了解地球危机重重为基础，讨论如何拯救地球为话题

2．语言技能目标

听 听懂有关不同保护环境方法的对话，提高学生实际应用能力

说 能用本模块的生词、短语开展对话、讨论，介绍各自生活中保护环境的方法

读 了解地球环境的现状, 通过阅读掌握reduce，reuse，recycle的含义和重要性，进行简单的阅读技能训练

写 1．能用核心词汇写出简短的、表达观点的句子

2．能写出生存现状和保护措施，形成完整的计划性文章

演示与表达 能向全班做有关生存现状和保护措施的发言与展示

3．学习策略目标

通过合作讨论、游戏、竞赛等多种活动形式，实现在用中学，学而能用的原则。

认知策略 调控策略 联系，归纳，推测等技能。

从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。

交际策略 学习运用恰当句子表达自己的观点。 资源策略 能利用多种途径及学习资源查找信息，用所学内容进行真实交际。 自学策略 能借助词汇图掌握单词，形成话题联想的习惯，培养学生的阅读能力技巧。 合作学习策略 关心周围的生存现状和保护措施, 交流并分享各自的观点并形成最终观点。

4．文化意识目标 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

引导学生关注社会，关注身边的事和人，关心周围的生存现状和保护措施，对学生进行环保意识的渗透。同时让他们了解保护环境离我们很近，身边有许多机会，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识和关爱地球之心。

5．情感态度目标

（1）通过开展生动活泼的教学活动，激发学生的兴趣。

（2）培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。 同时也积极鼓励学生参与社会实践活动。

（3）引导学生与他人合作，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务，尽情享受学习的乐趣。

四、重点难点

1.教学重点

重点话题：How to be green 2.教学难点

（1）前缀、后缀构词法及其积累

（2）能用恰当地道的英语表达对保护环境的看法。 3．突破途径

以话题为核心，通过个人思考、小组及班级活动等不同途径，在听、说、读、写中使单词及句型以不同的形式反复出现，在足够的输入中，达成有效的语言输出。

五、教材处理

1、任务

核心任务：能够运用所学句型结构向不同的朋友交流自己关于保护环境的看法。三个环节如下：

pre-task：学生通过多种途径了解有关环保的知识，激活背景知识。

Task-cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化“地球现状和保护环境的途径”的表达能力，为完成核心任务做好铺垫。

post-task：达成任务，展示成果，自我评价，反馈学习情况。

2、课时安排

Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.

Period Two: Unit 2 Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Period Three: Unit 3 Language in use (1) Period Four: Unit 3 Language in use (2)

六、教学设计

Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.

Step 1: Warming-up According to the words, let the students say something about our world and describe it.设计意图: 从学生所了解的世界入手，利用学生已有的认知水平进行头脑风暴，主要为下一步世界中最主要的环境问题的引出做准备工作。

Step 2: Lead-in 1.Watch a video about our world.

2.Discu: What problems did you see?

3.Work in pairs.Say what you should do about these problems.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

设计意图:

视频让学生更直观地了解到我们的地球所面临的日趋严重的环境问题。通过观看，思考和讨论，给学生提供一个运用英语的机会，培养了学生注意的能力和主题理解能力，更激发了学生保护环境的意识。 Step 3: Listening

1.Look at the photos.Describe and check them.(Activities 1 and 2)

2.Listen and read.Then do Activties 6 and 7.

3.Discu: Look at Activity 5.Choose one of them and answer it. 设计意图:

听力是学生的一个难关，因此在设计中应由浅入深，教师加以引导和帮助。活动五在课文中没有直接原文答案，为降低难度，可让学生选择回答，让各层次的学生都有事情可做，都有事情会做，提高参与率和成就感。

Step 4: Speaking

1.Watch a video.

2.Disu: Think of some ways of environmental protection.Complete the table with the ways.设计意图:

保护环境并不只是政府的事情，其实在我们身边有许多我们能做而常被忽视的。通过观看同龄人的行为，让学生了解我们不该做的很多，我们该做的更多。让学生考虑应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识，培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。

Homework: 1.Review Unit One.

2.Workbook: Page 133 Vocabulary and Listening.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.

(1) Think of more ways of environmental protection.

(2) Find out some problems around you and think how to solve them.Then write it down. Period Two: Unit Two Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Step 1: Warming-up

1.Check the homework.

2.Introduce some environmental groups.

3.Do a questionnaire.设计意图:

在社会中，包括政府在内，有许多的机构，单位，组织和个人都关心和保护着环境。通过问卷让学生领悟我们虽小，但我们可做的很多，而且这些可做的事就在我们的身边，就在我们的日常生活里，从而为课文的引出做好铺垫。

Step 2: Lead-in

Look at the pictures.Say which things are better for the environment and why.设计意图:

利用学生最熟悉的生活用品比较，在一定的语境中进行讨论和学习词汇。小组讨论可以集思广益，加深对课文的理解。而进行有意义的交流是词汇学习的上上策，培养学生词不离句学语言的好习惯。并且让学生从自身的感受和生活的经验来判断, 激发学生热爱生活、关心生活和保护环境的意识。 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step 3: Reading

1.Read the paage.

2.Work in pairs and answer the questions.(Activity 6)

3.Read the paage again and check the things you should do.Then give reasons for what you should or shouldn’t do.(Activities 4 and 5) 设计意图:

通过慢速和快速阅读培养正确的阅读方法，让学生了解文章的主旨，同时培养学生的猜词能力，提高阅读能力。通过学生自己的阅读，主动去发现问题，提出问题，并通过不同途径解决问题。通过有意义的回答问题这种说的练习不但加深了对文章的理解，而且突出了语言的交流功能。

Step 4: Writing

1.Work in pairs.Make some lists of things.

2.Make suggestions about how to be green.Give reasons，please.设计意图:

本部分为写作活动，与学生们的学习密切相关，同时也巩固先前的阅读所学知识，具有一定的难度，因此有必要提供范文。

1.本活动为写前活动，目的是收集信息，让学生深度理解三个重要词汇。

2.本活动是任务的主要阶段，首先让学生重温根据先前的图表信息，然后制定环保建议和理由。

Homework:

1.Review Unit Two.

2.Workbook: Page 134 Reading and writing.

3.Choose one of the two and finish it.

(1) Make suggestions about how to be green and give reasons.

(2) Make a list of things that you have done something to help our environment.

Period Three: Unit three Language in use (1) Step 1: Warming-up

1.Check the homework.

2.Watch a video.设计意图:

通过观看视频,让学生了解本堂课的主题是利用我们所学到的知识去讨论问题，解决问题。最重要的是如何从身边的小事开始，从我做起去保护环境，爱护环境，以达到学习和生活紧密联系。 Step 2: Practice

1.Complete the conversation with the correct form of the phrases in the box.(Activity 9)

2.Read the ideas on protecting the environment.Then practise and answer the questions.(Activities 6 and 7)

3.Work in pairs.Discu the question.(Activity 8) 设计意图:

练习经过重组，难度有简到难，逐步深入，让学生自然地接受，消化。练习8又为下一步的讨论打下基础。 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step 3: Discu

Work in pairs and talk about the picture.设计意图:

学生通过任务，分享各自的智慧火花，使口语能力得到提高。通过交流看法，多角度、多元化促进学生对知识的掌握和运用。从听、说逐渐过渡到下一步的写，由口头输出的流畅性过渡到笔头输出的精确性。

Step 4: Module task

1.Discu what you can do about pollution.

(1) Decide what type of pollution you want to talk about.It could be water pollutiong, air pollution, waste, cutting down forests, etc.

(2) Discu your topic.Say what you think about the problem and what can be done.

设计意图:

本部分为写作活动，可以巩固先前的阅读所学知识。本环节分为两个步骤：第一步是挑选内容，第二步是讨论和语篇写作。第一步对于英语基础不好的学生尤为有用。要求学生独立写作，同时又将学生自主学习与小组合作活动相结合，旨在培养学生独立自主的学习能力及分享观点，相互协作的能力。

2.Make a poster to tell others to protect the environment. 设计意图:

活动过程可让学生先看一些例子，然后选择一个话题，收集相关资料；为招贴画选择一个标题；对招贴画进行描述介绍；进行评比打分，选择优秀作品在班级报栏展示。该活动有助于培养学生资料收集、筛选的能力，培养学生的主题意识和话题意识，以及小组成员的合作意识。让学生明白不光自己要有环保意识，更要号召、呼吁身边的人一起爱护环境，保护环境。

Homework:

1.Review Language in use (1).

2.Finish the module task.

Period Four: Unit three Language in use (2) Step 1: Word games

1.Make new words.According as the word, make new words as many as you can.

2.Make new words.Join the words in Box A with the parts of words in Box B.Step 2: Practice

1.Do Activities 2, 3 and 4.

2.Workbook: Grammar and vocabulary.设计意图:

加前、后缀是英语中最常见的扩充词汇的方式，也是学习英语必须掌握的构词法。但常用的前缀、后缀非常多，因此应指导学生在学习的过程中自己学习，讨论，研究和发现其规律，并注意平时的积累。

Homework:

1.Review Language in use (2).

2.Finish the module work.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Module 7 Australia教学设计

Unit 1 I’m looking for the photos that you took in Australia!

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: crocodile, shark, hand, have a look at, alongside, detail Key structure: The attributive clause with that

2.Listening skill: To understand conversations involving the Attributive Clause in listening.Improve the students’ listening ability.

Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP) Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Lead in Divide the cla into several groups and each group has two, three or more students.One student acts as a travel agent, the other students want to travel.The agent will recommend some cities or countries to the others.设计意图: 复习七八年级所学过的关于城市和国家的知识，自然的过渡到本单元的关于澳大利亚的重点对话。并且可以培养同学之间的合作与交流，提高会话能力。

Step 2 Presentation Show students a picture of Sydney Opera House and tell them ―Tony’s father has been to Australia.He visited Sydney Opera House.‖ Then get them to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions: 1.Where else did he visit? 2.What animals did he see? 设计意图: 因为是一篇较长的对话，所以让同学们带着问题去听，第一遍不要求逐字逐句听懂，但要能回答出简单的问题。 Step 3 Read and repeat Get the cla to read the dialogue.Then ask them to read in pairs.Step 4 Complete the table After the students are familiar to the dialogue, ask them to complete the table in Activity 4.设计意图: 在这一步骤中,让学生从说转移到写上,并且让同学们在完成表格的同时更加熟悉课文。

Step 5 Answer questions Get students to answer questions about the dialogue.Step 6 Grammar Show students several sentences involving The Attributive Clause in this unit.Ask them to think of the use of the word ―that‖.

设计意图: 在本单元只是呈现一下定语从句的概念，让同学们对此有一个印象，而不必强调如何去改写定语从句。在以后的两个单元的逐步练习中再让同学们慢慢地对此语法熟悉起来。

Step 7 Homework

1.Read the words and the dialogue frequently.Try to recite part of the dialogue.2.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.

Unit 2 The camel that I rode had a bad temper. 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: grape, ham, lamb, outback, relative, sheep, spir, surfing, wine, helicopter, purple, similar, ours, cricket, rugby, sunshine, expreion, mate, temper, lifestyle Key structure: 1.The restrictive attributive clause with that 2.Reading skill: The students can read the long paage and can write some notes about it.Improve the students’ reading ability.

Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP) Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Get the whole cla to play a game called ―I describe, you gue‖. 设计意图: 由游戏开始上课,同学们会比较感兴趣，尤其是九年级的同学。通过游戏的形式让同学们能够较轻松地读懂并理解带定语从句的句子。 因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。

Step 2 Read and check Get the students to read the paage once or twice quickly, and after that ask them to find the information about some numbers.Then check the true sentences.设计意图: 第二单元编排了一篇长课文，教师可以把它当成阅读课来上。所以先让同学们快速阅读，然后找出一些关键句，并能够判断句子的正误。能够做到以上两点就可以了。 Step 3 Read again and write notes.Get the cla to read the paage again, but this time read it more slowly.Then ask them to take some notes for Tony.The students can finish this job individually or they can discu with their partners.设计意图: 通过做笔记，能够使同学们加深对课文的理解，并且加强同学们的归纳理解能力。 Step 4 Read and repeat After the students are familiar to the paage, ask them to read the paage after the tape.Then they can read by themselves.Step 5 Explain some useful expreions.

The teacher explains some useful expreions and grammar points.Step6 Homework

1.Read the words and the paage frequently. 2.Copy the words and expreions.3.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.

Unit 3 Language in use

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: water sports, grey, ancestor Speaking skill: To say sentences involving the attributive clause.Writing skill: To write sentences involving the attributive clause.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP) Teaching Procedures: 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step 1 Play a game Play another ―I describe, you gue.‖

设计意图: 本单元是一个复习单元,以游戏引出话题，活跃课堂气氛，鼓励学生大胆表达。因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。（让同学们事先准备好图片）。在做这个游戏时，同学们能够很轻松地说出带定语从句的句子，能够在游戏当中掌握好本单元的语法重点。 Step 2 Read a dialogue Read a dialogue completed by the teacher and ask the students to make similar dialogues.Try to use the Attributive Clause.Read the conversation and pay attention to the underlined words .A: Do you want to see my photos? B: what photos? A: The photos that I took in Australia.

1.A: What surprised you most in Australia?

B: The thing that surprised me most was the weather! 2.A: What do you call that famous Australian animal? The one that can jump very high.

B: Oh, you mean a kangaroo.3.A: What’s the name of that dangerous animal?

B: The one that is green? That’s a crocodile.

设计意图:本单元是复习单元，尽可能让同学们运用本单元所学过的知识来自己编对话，做到灵活运用，大胆创新，并且还有助于合作与交流。

Step 3 Join the sentences.

Ask the students to join the sentences with “that”.(句子见幻灯片)

Step 4 Finish Activity 1 Read the paage and underline all ― that‖ in the Attributive Clause.

设计意图:在第三和第四步中，着重点在写上。经过了前面两个单元的学习，本单元的重点是让同学们能够写出带定语从句的句子，这也是本模块的一个任务。 Step 5 Around the world Show students a picture of Australian athlete and hero.Ask students to learn from her.Step 6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook.

Module 8 Photos Teaching Plan

一、题材内容

本模块以“摄影”为话题，借此让学生描述自己最理想的摄影作品。通过本模块的学习，学生进一步学习定语从句的用法。为学生提供了充足的语言实际运用的机会。学生可以围绕这一话题进行大量的听、说、读、写方面的语言实践活动,促使学生更有意识地自觉学习英语。语法难点仍是定语从句。教学中教师应随时随地灵活利用各种素材组织教学过程和内容，充分调动学生的积极性。 教学目标： 1)语言知识： 语音 能够准确掌握句子中的单词重读。 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

词汇 trouble,shot,kid,expect,historic,size,beauty,category,movement,feature,include,rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, frightened 词组 on the left/right, pick up, even though 语法 功能 能使用who, which 引导的定语从句。 Measuring; Describing people and things.话题 以“摄影”为话题。 2)语言技能：

听 Identifying photos from descriptions.说 Describing photos.读 Transferring information to a table.写 Writing a description of a photograph.演示与表达 能够向他人介绍自己的摄影作品。

3)学习策略

学习一定程度形成自主学习，有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。 认知 联系，归纳，推测等技能。学习查词典,阅读报刊,上网等提高自学能力。 调控 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。 交际 资源 学习运用恰当词语介绍自己的摄影作品。

通过报刊、书籍、网络等其他资源获取更多简单英语的有关摄影的信息。

自学策略 能够根据自己的情况预习教材并进行拓展。 合作学习策略 能够根据小组内同学的特长分工合作， 积极参与讨论，互相学习，取长补短，注意从他人的演示中汲取经验,注意学习策略共享。

4)文化意识：乐于了解世界各地人们审美观念。

5)情感态度：培养学生互助合作的情感素质。参加各种英语活动,感受学习的乐趣，克服困难，在新环境中进一步树立准确的语言学习观，通过欣赏他人的摄影作品，提高自己的审美情趣。

6)任务:能够描述自己的摄影作品。

教学重点和难点：

重点：1．通过谈论自己的摄影作品，训练学生的听、说、读、写能力； 2. who,which引导的定语从句。

难点： 掌握使用who,which引导的定语从句。

教学方法：

基于课程改革的理念及“第二语言习得论”,培养实现人的可持续发展和人的主体精神的自我完善和发展所必需的能力和素质，运用任务型教学途径，围绕核心任务，设定小任务，开展和谐愉悦的课堂活动，强调兴趣第一的原则,初步设计“P—T—P”自主学习立体模式：pre-task„task-cycle„post-task。

二、教材处理

核心任务：能够收集、拍摄自己最喜欢的作品，并能运用所学句型结构谈论他们。 三个环节如下：

pre-task：学生联系生活实际，激活背景知识。

task –cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化使用who,which引导的定语从句来谈论摄影作品的表达能力，为完成任务做好铺垫。 post-task：达成任务，展示成果，反馈学习情况

三、教材安排

根据学生学习英语的特点和规律，我们把本模块划分为4课时： 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking Period 2: Reading

Period 3: Writing& Around the world &Module Task Period 4: Language in use 注：教学时应根据学生的学习水平、生活实际水平、接受程度及课堂出现的临时状况进行运用、调整及筛选。 『教学设计』

Title:

Module 8 Photos

Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking 1.Teaching Aims and Demands:

1) Key vocabulary: trouble,shot,kid,expect, on the left/right, pick up, 2) Listening skill: To understand conversations involving talking about photos.Improve the students’ listening ability.

3) Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know something about the Blues band, and practise making dialogue about photos.3.Teaching approach: Communicative teaching

4.Learning strategies: Bottom –up approach and listening to the tape and do some exercises.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP, Blackboard) 6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision

Task 1: Recall what we have learned in Module 7.

1.Label the pictures with the words and expreions.(1).Read through the words and expreions in the box and have the Ss.Repeat them after you.

(2).Ask them to label them in the pictures on the screen.

(3).List some words which are connected with Australia.Ask students to speak out as many as they can.2.Tell something about Australia.Ask students to speak out as much as they can.

Step 2 Lead in

Task 2: Show some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, and lead in the topic of photos.Then learn the new words of this unit.1.Get them to enjoy some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, 2.Show them a picture of a concert.Let Ss gue what it is and what’s happing in this photo, then introduce the new words.3.Discu the picture, using the words in the box in Activity 1.Step 3 Listen and read Task 3: Listen to the tape and finish Activity 2 .Then check and call back the answers. 1.Play the recording while they just listen and focus on the words in Activity 1.2.Have them check their answer with a partner and play the recording again.3.Check and call back the answer from the whole cla.Task 4: Listen to the tape again and do Activity 4,5 .Then check and call back the answers. 1 Show them the questions in Activity 4.2.Play the recording and have them listen to the recording and focus on the questions in Activity 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

4.3.Play the recording again and have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.4.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Read the conversations in Activity 3.Make sure that Ss understand the conversation.6.Complete the sentences in their own words Activity 5.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 5: Let the Ss finish the Activity 6 by themselves.Then check and call back the answers. 1.Show them the questions in Activity 6.2.Have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.3.Then check and call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 6: Read 1.Play the recording again and pause after each phrase, asking the Ss.to repeat chorally and individually.2.Put the Ss.into groups of 5 to practise the dialogue.

3.They should repeat it several times, changing the roles each time.Step 4 Pronunciation

Task7: Listen and repeat the sentences in Activity7 on page 65.Make sure that they stre the underlined words.

1.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat the sentences.

2.Play the recording again.Ask the Ss to pay particular attention to the word stre.3.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat chorally and individually.

Step 5 Speaking

Task 8: Work in pairs, choose a photo to talk about and finish Activity 8.Then check and call back the answers.

1.Get each of them to choose a photo.2.Ask them to work in pairs to share their descriptions.3.Call back some examples in a whole-cla setting, paying special attention to the use of the attributive clause guided by who \ which..Step 6 Homework

1.Do Exx7.8&9 in the Wb.2.Oral work: Read the conversation of Activity 3.3.Preview Unit2 in Module 8.

Period 2 : Reading 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Language knowledge: historic, size, beauty, category, movement, feature, include, rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, photographer, present, ceremony，even though 2) Reading skills: To detect and foster the students’ reading skills To get information from the reading material.

3) Emotion &Attitudes: To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points: To let the students know something about photo competition

and learn something about the differences among entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

3.Learning strategies: Communicative approach.4.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (Tape recorder, OHP) 5.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1:Help students to revise what was learnt in Period1of this module.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos. 2.Have the Ss.talk about them. Step 2 Preparation Task2: Let the Ss preview the new words and make them build the conception of entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos, then lead in the Activity 1.

1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos. 2.Have the Ss.talk about them.

Task 3: Learn the new words, then label the pictures with the words.1.Read through the words on the screen.Have the Ss.Repeat them after you.

2.Read the words separately and have them remember them. 3.Make some sentences with the words. 4.Call back the answers from the whole cla Step 3 Scanning and Skimming Task 4: Scan this paage, according to the content , finish Activity 3.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage as quickly as poible.2.Do Activity 3 .Complete the table and write notes 3.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Step 4 Reading Task5: Let the Ss read the paage by themselves in details, and do Activity 4.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the sentences in Activity 4.

2.Read the paage by themselves.And ask to finish the true or false exercises.3.Check the answers with the whole cla.Task6: Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, and finish Activity 5.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to listen and repeat the paage simultaneously.2.Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, 3.Get the students to correct the sentences..4.Call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Language points in the paage.Task7: Finish Activity 6, Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage together loudly.2.Discu the following questions in groups.

1)―…read on to find out who the winners are.‖ where do you find who the winners are?

2)―…the fun which their fans are having.‖ Why are the fans having fun?

3) ―It succefully shows the rich culture which makes Beijing so famous..‖ Who or what shows the rich culture? 3.Share the ideas.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Step 5 Pairwork Task6:Finish Activity 7.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the table.2.Work in pairs.Ask and answer about the places.3.Get Ss to talk about the claroom.Step 6 Practice 1.Do Exercise 10 on page 142 in the WB.

2.Give the students some time to recall what they’ve learned in this cla.Step 7 Homework 1.Read the text.2.Retell the text.

Period 3: Writing & Around the world &Module Task 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1) Writing skill: To write something about a photo.Improve the students’ writing ability .

2) Reading skills: To get information from the reading material A famous photo.

3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Learning strategies:Top-down and Interactive approach and do some exercises.3.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (Tape recorder, OHP) 4.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1: Help students to revise what was learnt in the last cla.

1.Revise the words and phrases.2.Let the Ss.retell the text. Step 2 Writing.Task2: Write sentences about their favorite photograph.1.Ask the Ss run through the questions in Activity 8 on Page67 and w rite sentences about their favorite photograph..

2.Call back the answers from the whole cla, having individuals read their sentences. Task3: Write a short paage describing their favorite photograph 1.Ask the Ss to do this individually.2.They can exchange it with a partner for peer correction.3.Have some students read their paage out to the whole cla.Step 3 Around the world Task4: Learn something about a famous photo.1.Ask the Ss.to look at the photo about the space.Tell the Ss.some knowledge about it.2.Read the text and answer any questions the Ss have.Step 4 Module Task Task5: Making a photo show.1.Activity 10 on page 71.Ask the Ss.to write about their favorite photo, saying what /who it is and why it is important to them.2.Activity 11 on page 71.Show their photo to their group.And tell others why they like it and why it is important to them..Answer any questions their group may have.Listen to the other 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

members of their group talk about their photos.3.Activity12 on page 71.Put all the photos on the table and talk about them in groups.Step4 Recalling Recall what we have learned today.Step5 Homework 1.Do Ex.11 on page 143.

2.Do the Self-aement on page 143.

Period 4: Language in use

1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)To detect and foster the students’ understanding of grammar skills (skill) 2)To master the useful words and expreions(knowledge) 3)To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different

photos(emotion) 2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know how to use ―Which and Who ‖ to make attributive clause

3.Teaching approach: Communicative teaching

4.Learning strategies: Formal instruction and task-based approach and interactive practice.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (recorder, OHP ) 6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Help students to revise what is learnt in 3 periods of this module.Step 2 Listen and speak Task1:Look at the photos in Activity 8,then discu them. 1.Get Ss.to describe cameras in the photos.2.Say how you think cameras have changed since their earliest beginnings.Task2: Practise listening 1.Ask the Ss.to listen to the conversation and do Activity 9 on page 70 individually. 2.Listen again and check with their partners.3.Call the answers back from the cla.Step 2 Write Task 3: Complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box.1.Ask the Ss.to complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box in Activity 1 and Activity 7.

2.Call the answers back from some students.Step 3 Language practice Task4: To summarize and consolidate the attributive clause guided by who/which.1..Read through the examples with the Ss.and make sure that they are familiar with the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.2.Ask the Ss.to repeat the sentences in the box.3.Ask―Can you make other similar examples?‖

4.Focus the Ss’ attention on the ways in which they are used: who/which.Task5: Do Activity2 and Activity 3 on page 68 individually. 1.Ask the Ss.to check with a partner.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

2..Ask the Ss.to read out the sentences.

3.Summarize the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.Task 6: Join the sentences with who or which. 1.Ask the Ss.to do Activity 4 on page 69 individually. 2.Call the answers back from some students.Task7: Use the knowledge of this module to make an instruction of Activity 5 . 1.talk about the two pictures.2.Then talk about the people in the two pictures.3.Now ask questions about the picture, and write down their answers. Step 4 Gue Task8: A gueing game

1.Look around the cla and describe something to their partner, using the knowledge of this module.2.Gue who/what I am describing. Step 5 Homework:

1.Finish all the exercises in the WB.2.Preview Module 9.

The Teaching Plan for Module 9 Cartoon stories Unit 1 We need someone like superman who can save Tony.Type of leon Listening and speaking Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:

To understand the conversation involving the use of the restrictive attributive clause; Emotional experience: To be able to retell Tony's experience and what his clamates did when Tony was in trouble .Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: To ask and give information about one's favourite cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.The new words and phrases.ending, flash, laughing, over there, word, have a word with 2.Master the structure of restrictive attributive clause with that, Which and who.1.Remember the new words of this unit.2.do some exercises by using them,and make more sentences.Teaching procedure Step1 Greeting and revision Say hello to everyone.Revise the grammar by doing some exercises The boys _______are playing football are from Cla One.Football is a game _______is liked by most boys.The school in _______he once studied is very famouse.We bought a book ________had lots of cartoons in it.Step2 Presentation 1).Remember the words in the box of activity 1 (with time limit--30s) 2).Complete the sentences with words what you have remembered A _______________is a person who plays a part in a story, and the _______is the person who plays the main part.A ___________cartoon is one which doesn't make you ________, such as a ____________of a news story.A cartoon in which the hero saves someone is a story with a happy___________.A ________is a story you tell to make people laugh.Step 3 Listen and read.1.Listen to the tape carefully.

2.Ask and answer in activity 4 1).What does Betty think the ending will be 2).Why is the situation no laughing matter 3).How do you think Superman can save Tony

4).When will Tony poibly find out that his friends have got the camera 5).Why does Betty says she'll be Superman 3.Explain the language points 1)This is serious.这是很严肃的.2)But it's no laughing matter.但这不是开玩笑的事情.3)to have a word with 和某人说句话 4)That's good news.那是好消息.5)Here you are.给你.6)in deep trouble 处于险境中

7)Oh dear!噢, 天啊! dear adj.①亲爱的, e.g.Dear Sir./ My dear.②昂贵的 (expensive) eg.That's a dear shop.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

③int.(表示伤心,焦急, 惊奇等) 呵! 哎呀 eg.Oh dear! serious (adj.) 严肃的,认真的 --- seriously (adv.) eg.Are you kidding or are you serious 你是开玩笑还是认真的

Grandma is seriously ill.祖母病的很重.4.Translation the whole conversation by students.5.Work in pairs to complete the sentences in activity 5 in your own words.Step4.Pronunciation and speaking Listen and repeat the sentences.Step5.Homework Do the WB activity 1.Learn the conversation by heart.Blackboard Writing Design 1.But it's no laughing matter.但这不是什么可笑的事情.2.Have a word with sb.和某人说句话.比较:Have words with sb.与某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于that's a good idea.4.Be in deep trouble.处于大麻烦/险境中.Self- reflection

Unit 2

There are several fan clubs in China which have held birthday parties for Tintin.Type of leon Reading and writing Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:

1.To get information from the reading material about cartoon stories.2.To learn some new vocabulary.Emotional experience: To learn more expreions of describing cartoon stories.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: 1.To know more about many cartoon of China and abroad; 2.To write about a cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.To understand the paage, 2.To learn the restrictive attributive clause with that, who and which 1.To get the main idea of each paragraph.2.Find out the restrictive attributive clause in the paage and explain them.Teaching procedure Step1 Warming-up

1.Review the text of Unit 1

2.Let the students act out the dialogue in pairs. 3.Introduce the new words. Step 2: Reading 1.Talk about the following questions by groups.1).Do you like watching cartoons

2).What cartoons have you ever watched

3).Do you know the names of the following cartoon characters 4).Are they in recent cartoons or old cartoons

5).Use the words in the box to describe the cartoon characters.2.Listen to the paage to find out and check your answers.Name of cartoon Recent/Old Description Nemo Shrek the Monkey King Tintin Snoopy 3.Read the paage and find out the sentence which best summarizes the paage in activity 4.4.Listen to the paage again and choose the correct answer.1).The Monkey King is a cartoon character which_______.a) causes problems in heaven b) has travelled to the moon 2).Shrek is a monster who__________.a) falls in love with a prince b) was born from stone 3).Nemo is the name of a _________.a) fish which is caught by a diver b) big, fat cat which is very lazy 4).Snoopy is a lovable dog which was created by____. 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

a) Tintin

b) Charles Brown's 5.Work in pairs and answer the questions in activity5.Step 3.Key words and expreions 1.favourite n.喜欢的东西/人 adj.特别喜欢的 2.series n.系列(单复同形) 3.translate v.翻译 translation n.翻译, 转化 translator n.翻译者 4.Belgian n.比利时人 adj.比利时人的 Belgium n.比利时 5.create v.创造

creation n.创造

creative adj.有创造力的

6.orange-and-white 橘白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的

如果用表同一方面情况(如说明性质,颜色,物质)的两个或两个以上的形容词来作定语需用and连接.7.ever since 从„开始

从他退休以来,已经在这呆五年了.He has been here for 5 years, ever since he retired.8.But it is above all the jokes played by the monkey that people remember.it 引导的强调句用来对句中某一成分加以强调.结构:"It is (或was) +强调部分+ that (或who)„ Step 4.Homework 1.Writing: try to write a cartoon by yourself.2.Complete the activities 5~8 on P145 (WB) Blackboard Writing Design 1.fan club 影迷俱乐部

2.orange-and-white 橙白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的 合成词作定语 3.win the heart of sb.赢得某人的心

4.in heaven 在天宫里

5.mke a me 搞得乱七八糟 see a me 看到狼籍一片 „„ Self- reflection

Unit 3 Langugage in use Type of leon Revision and application Period 2 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Teaching Aims Language goals: To summarize and consolidate the language knowledge in this module.Emotional experience: To learn something about cartoons, to complete a task involving making a cartoon story Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Review the paive voices that students' have learned.2.To train students' ability of words and speaking.Realization of culture: Learn how to describe cartoon heroes, how to make a cartoon.Teaching aid Formal and interactive practice, task-based activities Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment To train students' ability of words and speaking.To be able to help each other in communication.Exercise method.Writing and Oral practicing method.Teaching

procedure Step 1.Greeting and revision 1.Review the text of Unit 2 2.Complete the sentences with which, who or that.1) The man_______we met was a cartoonist.2) He drew a dog___________had six legs.3) The cartoon and the cartoonist _________you're talking about is very famous.4) I know a teacher_______________is also a cartoonist.5) The picture____________I like best is the first one.6) Did the children watch a cartoon____________was drawn by Alice last Friday 3.Join the sentences with who, which or that.There's a Chinese artist.You must meet him.There's a Chinese artist (who) you must meet.Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask them what language point is demonstrated. Attributive Clauses (引导词的省略) Step4.Vocabulary 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

1).Complete the paage with the correct words in activity 8.2).Complete the paage with the correct phrases in the box in activity 9.Step5.Grammar 1.Attributive Clauses

The cartoons (which / that) I like have lots of jokes.在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作宾语就可以省略,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作主语就不能省略,否则会造成结构混乱,影响表达.I've got a camera which has got his name on it.Perhaps it'll be a cartoon which has a happy ending.It tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys.eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make leons that are usually boring more interesting.2.Exercises 1.Do the exercises 1.2.3 in WB.

2.多项选择.从下列ABCDE中选出符合题意的任意项.A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom (见附表) Blackboard Writing Design Attributive Clauses

The cartoons (which / that) I like have lots of jokes.在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作宾语就可以省略,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作主语就不能省略,否则会造成结构混乱,影响表达.eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make leons that are usually boring more interesting.Self- reflection Appendixes/Unit 1 1.But it's no laughing matter.但这不是开玩笑的事情.表示的否定强度比 Not a laughing matter.强得多.2.have a word with sb.和某人说句话.等于to talk to some one for a short time.a 与谈话中说了多少没有任何关系.比较:have words with sb.与某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于That's a good idea.4.be in deep trouble.处于大麻烦/险境中.Exercises: 根据给出的汉语意思或首字母提示完成下列各题.The story has a happy ending (结局).三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

We feel that life is no laughing matter (开玩笑的事情).This isn't one of those cartoons (卡通)which make you laugh.Come here and I have a word with you.Did you have any trouble finding your way here You can imagine how surprised I was.Appendixes/Unit 2 1.fan club 影迷俱乐部

2.orange-and-white 橙白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的 合成词作定语 3.win the heart of sb.赢得某人的心 4.in heaven 在天宫里

5.make a me 搞得乱七八糟 see a me 看到狼籍一片 me 一般以单数形式出现, e.g.You are really a me! 你脏透了! What a me!真乱!

Your room is in a me! 你的房间乱七八糟的.6.favourite adj.喜爱的,n.特别喜欢的人或物 7.ever since 自从,从那时到现在,从„„开始

e.g.She has been rich, ever since she met a good man.8.translate into 翻译成„,translate sth.from a language into another language.9.a series of 一系列 series的单数复数一致

Appendixes/Unit 3 定语从句中引导词/关系词的省略问题.如果引导词/关系词在从句中作宾语成份可以省去引导词/关系词,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.但是作主语不可省,否则会造成结构混乱.which 指物可作主语和宾语,that 指人指物可作主语和宾语,who 指人在正式语体中只作主语,whom 指人做宾语,但在非正式语体里界who 也可作宾语.关系代词 先行词

在从句中的作用 who 指人 做主语 whom 指人 做宾语 that 指人或物 做主语或宾语 which 指物

做主语或宾语

The cartoons (that/which) I like have lots of jokes.I like the teacher who teaches me English this term.在日常口语中,在定语从句中作宾语的引导词往往被省略,但在较正式的文字中则较少省略.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案

九年级

第 ５ 册

Exercises: 不定项选择.从下列ABCDE中选出符合题意的任意项.A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom 1.It is the third time ______you have made the same mistake.2.The factory _______we'll visit next week is not far from here.3.Do you know the man ________ I spoke to

4.Can you lend me the book ______you talked about the other day 5.The engineer ________my father works with is about 50 years old.6.That is the office ______Lincoln once worked in.7.All the apples _______fell down from the tree were eaten up by the pigs.8.The place__________interested me most was the Children's Palace.9.The number of the people _______own cars is increasing.

Module 10 Fitne

一、教学目标

1、语言知识目标 语音 词汇 朗读中停顿注意句群

ache exercise weight interest sugar tasty menu behave persuade ban educate typical

diet

fitne running weight lifting unlikely chip pasta cooking disadvantage advertise 词组 give up

bump into

语法 功能 话题 whose引导的定语从句

能用whose定语从句来描述人 以“健康”为话题。

2、语言技能目标

听 能听懂用包含所学的定语从句的口头表述，询问及其回应的听力材料。

说 能在语境中流利说出本模块的生词，能说一些有whose的定语从句 读 能读懂有关健康体育活动与饮食的短文，理解阅读材料中定语从句所表达的语义。进行一定阅读技能训练。

写 能写包含所学定语从句的句子，能结合实际写改善饮食的文章 演示与表达 能向同伴或全班讲述如何保持健康，并提出合理建议

3、学习策略目标

自主学习、有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。 认知 调控 交际 资源 自学 策略 合作 学习策略 互相学习，取长补短，注意学习策略共享，将自己所搜集的信息与其他同学共享。 联系、归纳等技能。观察并归纳的有Whose的定语从句结构，提高自学能力。 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及写作中的错误进行修改。 学习运用恰当词语，句子描述如何保持健康。

通过其他资源获取更多有关“健康”的英语材料。

培养在词语与相应事物之间建立联想的习惯，形成话题联想的习惯。

第20篇：外研版九年级上册英语全册教案

西塔庄初级中学英语学科教案

（2014——2015）年度第一学期

年级：九年级 学科：英语 姓名：张雪艳 时间2014年9月

Module 1 Wonders of the world Unit 1

What is a wonder of the world? 教

学

设

计 课

型 Listening and speaking 教材分析 This unit aims to review the learnt tenses so far and help students to be able to present some important and creative ideas about writing a school magazine. 教学目标 To learn and understand the topic words through talking and listening.To know something about the pyramids and the Grand Canyon.To understand the conversation about starting a school magazine involving different tenses.知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, event, listen up.That’s news to me.Anyone else? 2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To learn to give ideas on writing a school magazine.过程与方法 1.Top-down approach, enabling Ss to understand and talk about writing a school magazine.2.To learn by listening, speaking and discuing.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to know more about writing a school magazine of their own.

教学过程

教学步骤 教师活动

学生活动

活动目的

Step 1 Lead-in Start the leon by showing groups of pictures about the wonders of the world on the screen including the ancient pyramids.Ask students to talk about the picture on Page 2.T: Where can you see the pictures and the brief introduction probably? (Newspaper / the Internet / Magazine…)

T: Yes, magazines like Crazy English / National Geography…

Who started…? Learn the new vocabulary.(ancient, pyramid, review, wonder…)

Have a talk about the picture using the words in Activity 1.Learn a bit about magazines.Get the Ss to be attentive and focus on the theme of the leon.(Magazine) Step 2 Listening & Vocabulary Play the tape and check the words.Listen to the tape again.Make up poible questions according to the answers.Give examples.Listen and check the words.Make up questions according to the given answers.( Wh-questions) Practise listening and get specific information.Check their understanding by making questions. Step 3. Listen & read Play the tape for the 1st time.Ask Ss questions. T: What are the children doing?

Is there a school magazine in

Da Ming’s school? Listen to the tape and get the answers.Listen to get a general idea for the 1st time.

Play the tape again and ask students to decide T OR F.① Crazy feet is a band.② Becky Wang started a school magazine.③ Da Ming watched the interview on TV yesterday ④ Tony is writing a composition. Listen more carefully for the 2nd time.Decide whether they are true or false.Check the answers with the cla.Listen for the specific information and understand the details of the conversation. Step 4. Read Play the tape again and get Ss to practise the conversation.Check the language points. Focus on everyday English and useful expreions.(Listen up, Anyone else? do some review, do an interview, on=about, get better grades) Get Ss to make a list of the articles in magazines.Check the answers in Activity 4.Read the conversation aloud, and read in role.Answer the questions in Activity 4. Practise reading and go over how to give suggestions when in discuion.Learn more about writing a school magazine.

Step 5.

Pair work Go through the five questions and highlight the key words.Ask for more answers on Question 3.Ss take turns to answer the questions.Consolidate the key words and transit to the next step by Question 3. Step 6.Discuion Tell the Ss: If your school decides to start a magazine, what are you going to write about? And why? They can make up lists and take Activity 3 as an example.Report their discuion.Work out the lists and talk about their plans to write the magazine.Beginning: Our school will start a magazine.What articles are you going to write...Learn to discu in the way as the children do.Check Ss’ creativity.作业布置 Collect information about the seven wonders of the world.(Pictures and brief introductions) 板书设计 Unit 1 What is a wonder of the world?

school magazine

That’s news to me!

a wonder

What’s it about?

ancient pyramids

listen up

write a composition

Any more ideas?/ Anyone else?

do some reviews about…

on=about

do an interview with

Unit 2

Ｉwas on the edge of the Grand Canyon.

教

学

设

计 课型 教材 分析 Reading and writing By example this unit presents a good way to describe what one sees and feels after a journey.It can help students to know more about the Grand Canyon, and inspire Ss to love and explore the natural wonders. 教学目标 To get information from the reading material about the Grand Canyon; To learn the way of writing about what you see and your feelings when traveling; 知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: waterfall, stranger, rock, ground, canyon, reply, rise, face, get out of, look over, disappear into, look (acro) to„light-dark, clear, huge, beside, below, at the bottom of, reach the top. „too„to„

2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To love the wonders of the natural world and give facts and opinions.过程方法 1.Interactive approach.2.To improve Ss reading skills and get them to talk and practise writing by imitating.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to write a description of a wonder that they have seen or visited.

教学过程

教学步骤 教师活动

学生活动

活动目的

Step 1 Lead-in Ask Ss to show information about the seven natural wonders.(The teacher can get the related pictures ready beforehand) Present words in Activity 1.Talk and give facts about the wonders.Encourage Ss to describe with the words given.Check up Ss’ homework and start the new topic.(Wonders) Step 2. Ask andanswer Ask Ss to make questions about facts of the natural wonders.Demonstrate and get Ss to follow.Ask andanswer.How tall/deep… is it?

It’s…meters tall/deep.Practise asking about detailed information and learn the sentence pattern. Step 3. Read(Skimming) Tell Ss to read the paage in Activity 2.Find out the name of the wonder and its facts.T: Where did the writer visit?

How deep/wide/long is it? Read the paage and

answer thequestions.Find out the facts and write them down in Activity 5.Practise reading skills and get specific information. Step 4 Read and match Play the tape and get Ss to follow silently.Find out the main idea of each paragraph.Present the five topic sentences on the screen (Bb).A.The writer arrived there on the rainy

morning; B.The first impreion/sight of the

Grand Canyon.C.The Grand Canyon is the greatest

wonder in his opinion.D.Details about the Grand Canyon.E.After minutes’ walk, he came to it.Ss follow the lines and match the topic sentences to the paragraphs.(or they can conclude the main idea by themselves if poible) Read for the main idea of each paragraph.Learn to sum up and help to understand the whole paage. Step 5 Read aloud Get Ss to read aloud after the tape and find the details about the trip.① When did he get to the Grand

Canyon? ② Why was there nothing to see? ③ Where was he facing on the edge of

the Grand Canyon? ④ How did he feel about the Canyon? Read aloud and answer questions in Activity 3.Ask for help if they have any problems. Practise reading and learn about the details, check their understanding. Step 6.

Focus Now get Ss’ attention to those phrasal verbs and prepositional phrases.Try to check by a gap-filling exercise.(get out of, go through, look over, fall away, on the edge of, look down/acro to, at the bottom of, disappear into, ask oneself ) Learn the verbs and phrases.Practising using them with the help of the gap-filling.Focus on the phrasal verbs and prepositions.

Step 7.

Match Activity 4 Ask Ss to find these words in the paage and gue their meaning within the sentence.Underline the words and match the English meaning. Practise gueing the meaning of words in the context. Step 8.Writing Tell Ss to imagine they have seen (some of them did see) one of the wonders of the world.Write sentences describing how they felt.Remind them of the four keywords: saw, size, happened, felt.

First get them to work in pairs and then report the sentences or paage if poible.

Write sentences according to the given beginning.Report their answers and tryto make them

into a paage.Practise writing and using the language on the basis of imaging and personal experience.作业布置 Finish writing the description of one of the wonders of the world, trying to collect some details and take the text as a model.板书设计 Unit 2 I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon The seven natural wonders of the world How tall/wide/deep is it? It’s…tall/wide/tall.

get out of

on the edge of

ask oneself go through

look down/acro to

huge=very very big look over

at the bottom of

the greatest wonder fall away

disappear into

Unit 3 Language in use

教

学

设

计 课型 Revision and application 教材分析 This unit serves to give a review and summary towards the language points learnt in U1&.2.

And it helps to clarify the exact differences among tenses.教学目标 To review and check the words learned in this module; To summarise and consolidate tenses learnt before; 知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: height, lift, view, attract, description, location, design 2.To enable the Ss to differ the tenses learned in situations.3.To make a poster of a wonder of the world/ one’s hometown.过程方法 1.Formal and interactive practice, task-based.2.Comprehensive ways of practising and consolidating.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world; To make a poster of a wonder of the world or his hometown and help to love one’s motherland.教学步骤 教师活动 学生活动 活动目的

教学过程

Step 1 Revision Ask Ss to watch and listen to the MV Chinese by Andy Lau.Get them to find out the wonder in it.

Encourage Ss to describe what they see in it , e.g. The Great Wall is a great wonder. Andy Lau went to the Great Wall. He was singing on it. He has sung many popular songs. … Watch and talk about things appear in the MV.Learn to tell the differences among the tenses.Help to establish the concepts of tenses in situations. Step 2.

Grammar focus 1.Read through the sentences in the box with the whole cla.Call back ideas about the structure highlighted from the students.2.Give hand-out to Ss and ask them to match the exact meaning with the corresponding sentence.(Activity 1) Check the answers right after that.1.Read aloud the seven sentences.And tell the making-up of each tense.2.Read through the 5 pairs of sentences in different tenses and match.Practise telling the differences and meanings. Step 3. Writing 1.Go back to the picture of the Great Wall.Give examples by matching the three parts.The Great Wall + is + about 6,700 km long. Give Ss tips on how to decide.2.Encourage Ss to observe and decide the forms of verbs in different tenses. 1.Observe the subjects and the adverbial or even the phrasal verbs.Match the three parts to make poible sentences.2.Read through the uncompleted paage and try to give the correct forms of verbs in the situations. Learn to observe and practise language in different tenses. Step 4 Speaking 1.Show up the photo of visiting the Great Wall.Get Ss to ask the teacher questions in Activity 4.(Example) Get Ss to work in pairs, and ask and answer the questions.2.Present wonders in the local area. Get Ss to talk about them.1.Ss follow the teacher and make up their own conversations.

Perform in front of the cla.2.Learn the example in Activity 5 and make a similar introduction to the wonders in local area.Practise speaking and enable Ss to use the language and understand its meaning.

Step 5 Vocabulary Game Present nine pictures about wonders of the world, each of which links an exercise in Activity 6/8.Get Ss to finish them first and check in forms of game.Elaborate on the Pyramids in Egypt.(More related photos) Finish the multiple- choices exercises and choose the pictures they’re interested in to check the answers. With the help of games, Ss can review the phrasal verbs and concepts of tenses. Step 6.

Listening Present the three photos in Activity 7 Ask about facts about any one of them.Play the tape for Ss to learn more. Listen and match the notes with the photos.Check the answers after listening and report about the three wonders with the help of the table.Learn more about the three wonders, practising describing. Step 7.

Around the world Get Ss to look at the picture and read silently through the introduction.Give questions to check their understanding. Read and decide, trying to grasp the main information.Learn about another wonder of the world. Step 8.Module task Tell Ss to work in groups of 4.Read through the instructions.Help them to decide what to write about.Hold up a show-and-tell seion where Ss can display and discu.Work in groups of 4 and write about one wonder they like.Collect sufficient information and make the poster.Take part in the show-and-tell seion.

Take this task as an extensive learning activity to get Ss to learn more about the wonders.作业布置 Finish off the poster after cla and get ready for the show at the back wall of the claroom.Prepare the show-and-tell seion in groups of four.板书设计 Unit 3 Language in use

Structures of different tenses

ancient

The Great Wall is a wonder…

modern

wonders

Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.

natural

He was singing on it

height—What’s the height of…?

We are listening to him now.

on the journey of…

He has sung many pop songs.

because / because of He will visit it some other day.教学反思：

Module 2 Great books

一、教学内容分析

本模块的话题是谈论书、作家、思想家、戏剧、电影、诗歌等。语法是一般现在时被动语态。

二、学情分析

谈论书、作家、思想家等是学生感兴趣的话题。本模块的学习是通过该话题的讨论，学习并掌握一般现在时被动语态的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句和特殊疑问句。

三、教学目标

1、语言知识目标: ● 功能：谈论书、作家、思想家等。

● 词汇：1）能正确使用下列单词：work,influence,respect,wise,literature, behaviour,cave,freedom,funeral,social,theme,treasure,clever,dead,

pleased, alive, southern, state.

2) 理解下列单词：thinker, monthly, outsider, version, historical,

editor, publisher, reviewer.

3）能准确理解并使用下列词组；as far as,not„any more,millions of,

run away, grow up, talk about, be known as/for ● 语法：一般现在时被动语态。

2、语言技能目标

听：通过听进行单词和图片的配对。

说：谈论最喜欢的书、戏剧、诗歌和作家等。

读：能读懂对书、作家、思想家等作介绍的文章，能掌握从文章到表格 的信息转移。

写：写一本自己最喜欢的书。

3、情感目标：培养学生阅读的习惯，提高个人文化修养。

4、文化意识目标：了解中外著名的作家、思想家、诗人及他们的作品。

四、教学重点、难点

重点：key vocabulary___work, influence,wise,clever,behaviour,dead,alive,treasure

theme, southern,as far as,not…any more,millions of,run away,grow up,talk

about, be known as/for 难点：被动语态的构成和用法，主动语态如何改为被动语态。

五、课时安排 第一课时：Unit 1 第二课时；Unit 2 第三课时：Unit 3 第

四、五课时：Review and workbook Unit 1 Confucius’ works are read by many people Teaching aims :Learn the use of present simple paive.Key points: work, influence, thought, wise, copy, as far as, not…any more, millions of, be known as/for Difficult sentences: Shakespeare’s works are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain was an important writer, but he isn’t known as a great thinker like Confucius.

Step 1 Warming up& leading in 1.Ask the students some questions.Do you like reading books? What’s your favourite book？Who’s your favourite writer?

2.Show three pictures about Confucius, Shakespeare and Mark Twain.Let them gue who they are.Can you say something about them? Teach the words : work, influence, play, poem, respect, thinker, thought, wise, writer.Confucius: He was a great thinker in China.He is known for his wise thought.We are

still influenced by his thought.He is respected by us.Shakespeare: He was a writer of plays and poems.Some of his most famous plays are Hamlet and Romeo and Juliet.He was born in 1564 in England.His plays are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain: He was a famous American writer.He wrote a lot of stories.His books are still popular.For example ,The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.3.Do Activity 5.Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words.Step 2 Listening (Act.1&2) 1.First read the words in the box .Then match the words in the box with the people in the pictures.(Act.1) 2.Listen and check your answer to Act.1.(Act.2) step 3 Listening and reading(Act.3、4) 1.Listen and answer .Where are the speakers? What are they talking about? 2 .Read and answer the questions.(Act.4) 3.Everyday English and language points. What’s up? Go on! Sounds like a good idea.as far as, not …any more, millions of ,be known as/for 4.Read the conversation in two groups.Step 4 Grammar practice 1.Underline the sentences in the conversation that have the pattern of paive voice.2.Read the sentences aloud.3.Do WB Exercise 1 on p116 Step 5 Speaking and writing 1.Do Act.8 Work in groups of three and look at the opinions in the table.Report ideas of your group to the whole cla.2.Do Act.6 Talk about your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.Homework 1.write your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.2.Listen and read the conversation.

3.Search the internet about the book called The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.

Unit 2 It’s still read and loved Teaching aims practice reading skills.Try to write a paage about your favourite great book.Key points run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death Difficult sentences 1.The themes of the story are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious 2.It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.

Step 1 Warming up & leading in 1.Read the conversation you learned yesterday with your partner.Then answer the questions according to the conversation.What did Betty suggest at the end of the conversation in Unit 1? What’s Mr.Jackson’s favourite book?

2.Ask the students if they have read the book before.What happens in the book? What are the main ideas of the book? Show some pictures of the book and tell the story..

Teach the new words: behaviour, cave,freedom,funeral,outsider,pretty,social,theme,

treasure, nineteen century Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage quickly and answer the questions.Where can you read the paage? Why does Mr.Jackson like the book? 2.Read the paage again and complete the table with the information about it.(Act.3) 3.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4) Step 3 Read aloud and language points

1.Play the tape for the students to listen and read.2.Get the students to read each paragraph and discu the useful words and expreions.

run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death

It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 4 Writing

1.Work in pairs .Would you like to read The Adventures of Tom Sawyer ? Why/ Why not? 2.Think of your favourite great book you have read .Complete the table in Act.3 3.Write a paage about your favourite great book .

My favourite great book is Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone by J.K.Rowling.It’s a story about a young boy… Home work 1.Listen to the tape and practice reading the paage aloud.2.Write a paage about your favourite great book.

Unit 3 Language in use Teaching aims Language practice Key points Seeing a play is more interesting than seeing a film.First…then…,next…,after that…,finally… Difficult points The use of paive voice.

Step1 Revision 1.Read the paage in Unit 2 2.Show the paage about your favourite great book.Step 2 Vocabulary (Act.5&8) 1.Read through the words or phrases in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask the students to complete the paages, then check them.Step 3 Grammar 1.Ask the students to read the sentences in the box.2.Grammar teaching The teacher helps students understand the paive voice 1) 被动语态的构成：be +过去分词

时态在be 体现：am /is /are +done, was / were + done, have/has been +done 被动语态的句型：

肯定句：主语+be +过去分词+（by ~） 否定句：主语+be not +过去分词+（by ~） 一般疑问句：Be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）

特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+ be+主语+过去分词+（by ~） 2) 被动语态的用法：

I.要表达“被„”、”受„”、“遭„”、“让„”之类的语义。如： 教师很受尊敬—The teachers are well respected.

II.强调动作承受者。如：

他远近闻名—He is known far and wide.

III.不知道或没有必要指出动作的执行者。如：

房子每天都有人打扫__The room is cleaned every day.3) 主动语态如何改为被动语态：

Children

love

these songs

主动语态 These songs

are loved

by children

被动语态 3．Practice Do Act.1,2,3,4 and WB P117 Ex.4&5 Step 4 Listening and speaking(Act.6&7) 1.Ask the students to go through the table.2.Listen and check the statements about Betty and Daming agree with.3.Work in pairs .Ask and say which statements you agree with, and why._ __Do you think that modern books are great books? __Yes, I do .I think …/No, I don’t .I think… Step 5 Reading

Read ―Around the world ‖ on P17 and answer the questions.

When and where did Plato live? What was he? Where did he travel? What did he do when he returned to Athens? What are his works called? Step 6 Module task Discuion: Are we more influenced by films than by books? 1.Decide on your point of view.2.Think of some examples of films or books you have seen or read.How did they influence you? Homework: 1.Do Ex.2&3 on WB P116 2.Revise Module 2

Review of Module 7 and workbook Step 1 Revision 1.Revise the words and expreions you learned in the module.2.Do self-aement on P119.3.Do Ex 6,7,8 to check their vocabulary.Step 2 Listening and pronunciation.1.Listen and check the true sentences.(Ex 9 on P118) 2.Listen and repeat .(Ex 10 on P118) Step 3 Reading 1.Read and answer the questions.(Ex 11 on P118) 2.Listen and read it again.Let the students ask more questions about Dickens.Then answer them.Step 4 Grammar 1.Check Ex 2&3 on P116 to revise the paive voice.2.Do some more exercises about it.

教学反思：

Module 3 Sporting life

一、教材内容分析：

本模块以体育运动及奥运会为话题，通过谈论BIG与HAS间的前一次和下一次篮球比赛（Unit 1），介绍刘翔的成长历程（Unit 2）及奥运会（Unit 3）展开教学。要求掌握一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态；学习与体育运动相关的词汇及日常用语等。通过学习，放眼时事，体会体育明星光环背后所付出的勤奋与努力。

二、学情分析：

本模块围绕篮球等体育运动及奥运会而展开，又正直北京奥运会倒计时之际。相信学生对此内容会颇感兴趣。同时介绍了刘翔的成长历程，联系现实，阐明体育竞技的伟大及体育训练的艰辛，努力是将来成功的基石。

被动语态共分三个模块讲授，本模块第二次涉及这一内容，可谓承上启下。要求学生在熟练运用各种时态的基础上，将时态与语态相结合，需反复操练。在巩固一般现在时的被动语态的基础上学习一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态，并为学习现在完成时和情态动词的被动语态作好铺垫。

三、教学目标:

语言知识目标: (1)词汇：allow/defeat/stand for/against/tough/encourage/medal/record/set up/ first of all/represent/advertisement/coach/regularly/race (2)日常用语：You’ve got no chance!/What do you reckon?/Don’t let them get to you!/Nice work! (3)语法：一般过去时与一般将来时的被动语态。

(4)话题：讨论有关体育运动与奥运会的话题以及体育明星的成长历程。 语言技能目标：

听：通过对话与课文等的听力训练，理解简单的体育运动信息。

说：通过对文本等的学习，辅以问答及讨论等形式反复操练，学会简单讲述某名人的成长历程。

读：提高阅读能力，掌握文本精髓。 写：作一份关于班级内同学参加体育运动或观看体育比赛的调查报告。写一篇关于体育明星成长历程的简单报道。 情感态度目标：

通过学习，加强团队合作精神的培养，调动学生良性竞争的意识及英语学习的积极性。了解有关体育运动和竞技比赛的要素；了解奥运会特别是即将举行的北京2008年奥运会的相关信息；了解当代体育明星成功的奋斗历程，用理性的思维体会成功背后的艰辛与努力，指导青少年学生的个人成长。

四、教学重点及难点：

(一)掌握与体育运动等相关的词汇、句型及日常用语。

(二)掌握一般过去时与一般将来时被动语态的运用。通过各种题型的反复操练，掌握其与一般现在时的被动语态的不同用法。

(三)简单撰写某体育明星的一段成长经历或成功史。

五、课时安排： Period 1: Unit 1 Period 2: Unit 1-2 Period 3: Unit 2 Period 4: Unit 3 Period 5: Unit 3 Unit 1 When will the match be held? ⅠTeaching model Listening and speaking ⅡTeaching method Communicative approach ⅢTeaching aims Key words: allow, defeat, train, tough, chance, reckon, mad Key Phrases: stand for, get to Everyday English: a tough match You’ve got no chance! What do you reckon? Don’t let them get to you!

Nice work! ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, pictures, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step1 Warming-up and listening

1.Look at the pictures and talk something about sports.2.Look at the photos and describe them.You can use some of the words in the box to help you. 3.Listen and check the words you hear in Activity 2.Step 2 Listen and read 1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.3.Play the tape and have them read and follow.4.Act it out.5.Learn Everyday English.Step 3 Do Exercises 1.Complete the table in Activity 4.2.Listen again and check.3.Complete the sentences in Activity 5.Step 4 Work in pairs

Read the sentences from the conversation.Say who the underlined words refer to in Activity 6.Step 5 Explain the important and difficult points

Don’t let them get to you, Tony! 不要让他们影响你,托尼!

get to sb.意思是to make someone feel upset or angry,即\"让某人感到烦恼,困扰\"。如: The heat was beginning to get to me so I went indoors.天气很热,让我开始感到烦躁,所以我回到了屋内。

The smell of her old book really gets to me after a while! 过了一会儿,她的旧书散发出的气味实在让我不舒服。

Step 6 Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.Make sure you pause between each sense group in Activity 7.2.Say the sentence in Activity 8.3.Work in pairs.Talk about your favourite sports team or sports star this season.Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.1, 2, 3, 4&5.Unit 2 Liu Xiang was trained for gold.ⅠTeaching model Reading and writing ⅡTeaching method Bottom-up approach ⅢTeaching aims Key vocabulary : encourage , medal , set , set up , yearbook , represent , advertisement , coach , sportsman , overnight , skill , hurdling , sportswoman , race Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids OHP, tape recorder ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Warming-up 1.Gueing game: The Chinese champions in the Olympic Games.2.Talk something about Liu Xiang.3.Show some pictures .Look at the pictures and the title of the paage.Say what you know about Liu Xiang and how he became a sporting hero. 4.Introduce the new words.Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage in Activity 2.2.Play the tape and have them read and follow.3.Read the paage again.Step 3 Do exercises 1.Read the paage and choose the sentence which best exprees the main idea.Liu Xiang____.a) was helped by his sports school to become a gold medal winner b)will be encouraged to be a star and not a sporting hero c) has trained for many years , and will continue to win medals 2.Complete the time line with the notes in Activity 3.3.Answer the questions in Activity 4.

1) As a symbol, what does Liu Xiang represent? 2) Why isn’t Liu Xiang an overnight succe? 3) What was Liu Xiang advised to do in 1998?

4) What was the special programme set up in 2001? 5) What will he be encouraged to do in the future? Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points

1.And now that he\'s well known all over the world, Liu Xiang will also be asked to appear in advertisements and films, and even to record music.

现在由于刘翔已经世界闻名了,他还会被邀请做广告,拍电影,甚至录唱片。

now that 常常用为一种新的情况或状况做出解释,表示\"既然；由于\"。如: Now that Mr Liu has arrived , we can begin our meeting.既然刘先生已经到了,我们就开会吧。 2.Liu was encouraged at first to train as a high jumper.起初,教练支持刘翔练跳高。

encourage sb.to do sth.表示\"鼓励某人做某事\"。在本句中,encourage一词用于被动语态,表示刘翔是\"被鼓励\"去某事,而不是他\"鼓励\"别的人去做某事。如: Ms Wang always encourages us to speak English in cla.王老师总是鼓励我们课

上讲英语。

We were encouraged to learn foreign languages at school.学校鼓励我们学习外语。 3.It was set up in 2001 to help young sportsmen and sportswomen.它(特殊项目)建立于2001年,用来帮助年轻运动员。

set up表示\"建立,设立;创办(组织,企业);制定(计划等)如:

She plans to set up her own busine.她计划企业办自己的企业。

We need to set a meeting to discu the plan.我们需要开个会来讨论这个计划。 4.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态

英语的语态是通过动词形式的变化表现出来的。英语中有两种语态：主动语 态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。例如：

Many people speak Chinese.谓语：speak的动作是由主语many people来执行的。

被动语态表示主语是动作的接受者，即行为动作的对象。例如：

Chinese is spoken by many people.主语Chinese是动词speak的接受者。 1)一般过去时的被动语态构成： was/were＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.Liu Xiang’s races were recorded. 2)一般将来的被动语态构成： shall/will be＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang will be encouraged to go for more medals for China.Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport? 5.Learning to learn Step 5 Writing 1.Rewrite the notes in Activity 3 in full sentences. 2.Look at the sentences in Activity 6. A special programme helped Liu Xiang.

Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.

His skill at hurdling was noticed by his coach Sun Haiping. His coach Sun Haiping noticed his skill at hurdling. 3.Write sentences about Zhang Yining\'s training.

4.Join the sentences you wrote in Activity 6 to write a paragraph about Zhang Yining .Use and, although and because. Step6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.6, 7, 8&9.Unit 3 Language in use ⅠTeaching model Revision and application ⅡTeaching method

Formal and interactive practice ⅢTeaching aims 1.Key vocabulary: finishing line, award, marathon, Italian, turn, so far, champion, taekwondo, belt

2.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Revision Review the text of Unit 2 Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Grammar : 小结一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态

Step 3 Work in pairs.

1.Ask and answer the questions in Activity 1.2.Complete the paage with the correct form of the words in Activity 2.3.Look at the pictures and put them in the correct order in Activity 3.Step 4 Do exercises 1.Complete the conversation with the correct form of the words in the box in Activity 4. 2.Choose the best answer in Activity 5. 3.Listening:

1) Listen and check the true statements in Activity 6.2) Listen again and choose the correct answer in Activity 7.4.Put the sentences in the correct order to complete the conversation in Activity 8.Step 5 Around the world: The Paralympics Games Step 6 Module task: Module task: Making a cla sports survey

1.Work in groups.Write questions to find out about the sport people like to watch and do.

* What sports do you like?

* How often...?

* Do you like to...or...? 2.Carry out your survey.

* Ask as many students as you can to answer your questions. 3.Write the results of your survey.

1) Say how many students you asked the questions were.

We asked...student ―What...?‖

2) Compare their answers.

… students said ...and ...students said ... Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.10, 11, 12&13.教学反思：

Module 4 Great inventions Unit 1 Paper and printing have been used for ages 教 学 目 标

德育目标:To know something about the history of paper inventing 知识目标:To get information about the history of paper inventing from the conversation 能力目标:To talk about the advantages of some inventions To practise the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense and modal verbs. 重点

Vocabulary advantage, battery , borrow , camera, charge lend look after, online, photo, promise, same, turn off, turn on 难点

the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense, and modal verbs. 课型

Listening and speaking 教法

PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step one: Revision 1)Talk about some great invention, recall the words of inventions: TV, computer, watch, radios, camera, digital camera, photo, mobile phone, internet.Teach: online magazine 2) Recall what we have learned in the last Module Step two: Listening and vocabulary

1.Talking: What\'s the advantage of an online magazine 2.Listen and check the words 3.Listen and read ⑴ Play the tape to let the Students get the answer: Can the digital camera be borrowed from Tony\'s Dad

⑵Do Activity 4.Get the students to show their answers.⑶Listen and repeat.Notes:Everyday English Can I ask a favour 帮忙,赏光 Anyway„谈点别的,另外 Here it is.给你,在这儿 It doesn\'t matter.没关系

I\'ll see to that.我会处理的.Is that clear 清楚吗 懂了吗 Promise! 我一定! language Points

1) Paper and printing have been used for ages.for ages ---- for (many) years好多年了.类似短语: for hours/ days/months 等.2) The battery hasn\'t been charged for a couple of months.a couple of --- several 几个

3) I\'ll see to it.我来处理.see to sb./ sth.= look after, deal with \"处理, 照顾, 关照\" 4.) You must promise that it won\'t be….

promise to do/ that..= make a promise to do/that 答应, 许诺作某事 Promise!= I promise to do that.我答应! 5) turn on ----打开 turn off ----关闭 turn up -----开大 turn down ---关小

eg.Don\'t forget to ___________the light when you leave the room.Please ___________the TV, the football is beginning.Would you please ________it ______ a little I can\'t hear it clearly.The baby is sleeping.Please _____________ the radio a little.

4.Read the summary of the conversation.Underline the wrong information 5.Answer the questions Ask Ss to say their answers and check them together.6.Find the sentences in the conversation which mean Grammar Points

Will (won\'t_) + be +动词的过去分词为一般将来时的被动语态 have/has (not) been + 动词的过去分词为现在完成时的被动语态 情态动词+ be + 动词的过去分词为情态动词的被动语态 Summary: 各种时态的被动语态构成 一般现在时:S+ am/is /are + done 一般过去时:S+ was/were + done 一般将来时:S+ will + be + done

情态动词:S+can/may/must/should+be+done 现在进行时: S+ am/ is/ are + being+ done 过去进行时: S+ was/were + being+ done 现在完成时:S+ have/has + been+ done Pronunciation and Speaking Listen to the sentences and repeat.Homework: Finish work book 1-3 附加练习: 中英互译: I\'ll see to that._______________ 帮个忙________________ Promise.________________ 照相________________ look after________________ 好几个________________ turn off________________ 几年________________ Here it is.________________ 由„.代替________________ 改为被动语态句子

1.They have published two iues of this magazine.2.Betty has kept my watch for two days.3.I\'ll charge the battery for your MP3 players.4.I could not find my bag anywhere. 课题

Module 4 Great Inventions

Unit 2 Books could be produced more quickly and cheaply.教 学 目 标

德育目标:To research science and love science 知识目标: To understand paages involving present perfect perfect tense 能力目标:To learn a reading skill ----- Scanning To know the history about paper inventing 重点

Vocabulary Create, produce, ink, against, knowledge, spread, introduction, receive, 难点

Phrase:made of, at a time, by hand, at the beginning of, in a way, rather than, one day 课型

Reading and writing 教法

PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step I: Revision Have/has been + done This book/ discu/ on telephone It/ buy/by thousands of people Children/tell to read this book The book/ print/ again and again Other books /write /about this book Must/can/may be done 1.a) All students must read this book.

b) This book _____________by all students.2.a) Everyone can understand his ideas.b) His ideas ________________by everyone.3.a)I could not fine her books anywhere.b) Her books ________________anywhere.4.a) For a long time, many people could not use computers.b) Computers__________________by many 5.a) We can do the work now if you want.b) The work _____________now if you want.6.a) You must not take these magazines from the library.b) These magazines _________________from the library .Reading and vocabulary 1.Talk in pairs What are the advantages of both book and computers Can books be replaced by computers

2.Read and get the main ideas of the paragraphs P1 c.Life on paper and in print P2 a.The world before books P3.b.The invention of printing P4.d.Technology and books P5.e.Can books be replaced by computers Language Points 1.looks through 浏览,温习

2.with– without 带有„ / 没有„

3.be made of ---- be made from--- be made up of --- be made in------ be made by— be made into –-- 4.write words on-- make a book -- in those days -- at a time -- by hand --- as a result ---- 5.put„ against 将„放进/刻进 hold„ against 将„贴到

6.at the beginning of 在„初/ 开始时 7.after that 然后,之后 in a way 以„方式

8.compare„.with„.与„.相比 , 与„.相媲美

9.rather than 胜过,而不愿 prefer to do„ rather than do„ 情愿„而不.. be replaced by 被„.所替代 be read online 在网上阅读

3.Make notes to complete the timeline.4.Answer the questions 1.Why were books expensive and rare before the invention of printing 2.Why did ideas spread more quickly when books became cheaper 3.What can we use instead of books to get information Homework

Finish the workbook exercises 课题

Module 4 Great Inventions Unit 3 Language practice 教学目标

德育目标:To know about some great inventions 知识目标: To practice the use of paive voice 能力目标:To complete a task about \"How to improve inventions\" 重点

被动语态: 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时—— have/has +been+动词的过去分词 难点

情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时—— have/has +been+动词的过去分词 课型

Revision and application 教法

Formal and interactive practices Part I: Revision Language practice 现在完成时的被动语态: have/has(not) been +过去分词 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 Conclusion

被动语态的构成:be +动词的过去分词 一般现在时—— am/is / are +动词的过去分词 一般过去时—— was/were +动词的过去分词

情态动词—— aux.v.(must/can/could/may„)+ be +动词的过去分词 现在进行时—— be(am,is,are)+being +动词的过去分词 一般将来时—— will be/be going to be +动词的过去分词 现在完成时—— have/has +been+动词的过去分词 主动语态改成被动语态的步骤及注意事项 1.主动语态的宾语改成被动语态的主语.2.主动语态的谓语动词改成被动语态的谓语动词.do----be done 3.注意保持时态和人称的一致.

4.带双宾的谓语动词有两种改法.当把直接宾语改成主语时,谓语动词后必须加适当的介词: to / for.如:give-- be given to 此类动词还有:pa show send„

再如:buy--- be bought for此类动词还有:make draw cook mend„

5.一些动词不定式在主动语态中省略to作宾语补足语,改成被动语态时,to必须还原.注:1.不及物动词(vi.)不用被动语态.如:happen,take place ,appear disappear„没有被动形式.**几种特殊结构

1.My uncle gave me a gift on my birthday.---- I was given a gift on my birthday.A gift was given to me on my birthday.2.We often hear him play the guitar.He is often heard to play the guitar 注意:see, watch, hear, notice, feel, make, listen to, look at等动词/短语后作宾语补语的不定式都不带to;但改成被动语态后必须带to.Part II: Language Practice Read though the sentences with the students and talk about the highlighted structures.Exercises: Activities 1~8 Finish the exx with the students according to the highlighted words of every activity.Check the answers.Homework: Finish off the workbook exercise 教学反思：

Module 5 Museums

The Teaching Plan for Unit1 You mustn\'t touch it! Topic You mustn\'t touch it! Type of leon New leon Period(s) Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: To know something about the signs around you and obey the rules.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests and better attitude to learn English.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: To talk about the signs with \"mustn\'t, can\'t, Don\'t… No….\" And Word Formation --Compound words Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the signs Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: 1.The new words and phrases.2.The listening material of Activity 3.Special Strategies: 1.Give some time to the students to remember the new words.2.Talk something related with listening material before listening.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step1: Greeting and revision have/has been + 过去分词; 情态动词+be+过去分词

Step2: Talking: The signs around you (draw some pictures on the blackboard about sighs, ask students to gue) Step3: Listening and vocabulary 1.Match the pictures with the phrases 2.Listen and underline the correct word in each sentence 1) Read the words together and try to understand their meanings.2) Listen and check.3.Listen and read 1) Close the book and listen to the tape, then answer the question: What are they doing 2) Check the answer and listen again then finish part 5.3) Ask some students to check the answers.4) Listen and repeat.Language points: 1) look forward to 与pay attention to 中的to都是介词,后面应跟名词,代词或动名词,如: I\'m looking forward to meeting you.You must pay attention to the spelling in your writing.2) Hang on a minute! 等一下! 3) on one\'s own 单独的 4) take a photo 拍张照片

5) against 反对 be against doing sth.反对做某事 6) 几种表示禁止的表达方式: Don\'t+动词原形 No+名词/动名词 can\'t mustn\'t be not allowed to 7) No, you can\'t take a photo, either.Either在此用作副词,要与否定词连用,意思是\"也不\".如, I don\'t like coffee either.我也不喜欢咖啡.Step 4: Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.2.Pairwork: Talk about the rules you can or can\'t do in libraries or museums.Homework Copy the new words and recite the useful phrases.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 完成句子.1.禁止喧哗,它违反规定.No shouting! It\'s against the rules.2.好,让我们下楼吧! Well, let\'s go downstairs.3.不要碰,禁止你碰它.Don\'t touch! You mustn\'t touch it.4.不,你也不能拍照.No, you can\'t take a photo, either.5.赶快!否则我们将迟到了.Hurry up, or we\'ll be late for school.Self- reflection The Teaching Plan for Unit2 There\'s no shouting and no running.Designed by: Yang Lijian Date: Sep.29 Topic Type of leon New leon Period(s) Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.To know something about the Science Museum in London.2.Useful important phrases.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests about the Science Museum.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To get information about the Science Museum in London. 2.To understand paages involving Compound word.Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Phrases and Compound word.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the new words.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step1 Revision

Use \"mustn\'t, can\'t, Don\'t No.\" to make more sentences about the rules for museums or libraries.(Tips: game or competition.) Step2 Reading and vocabulary 1.Read the words and talk about the pictures.2.Read the paage and answer the questions.3.Check the answers and listen to the tape.4.Complete the table and check 5.Language points: 1) allow doing sth.允许做某事.如, They don\'t allow smoking in the museum.他们不允许在博物馆吸烟.allow sb.to do sth.允许某人做某事.如, My parents don\'t allow me to read in the bed.我父母不允许我躺在床上看书.be allowed to do sth.被允许做某事.如, Students are not allowed to smoke.学生们不准吸烟.2) work out 计算出 3) try out 检验,试用

4) fill„with„ 用......填充......She filled the bottle with water.她用水装满了瓶子.区别:be filled with 表示\"充满\",强调动作; be full of 表示\"装满,盛满\",表示状态.Hs heart was filled with gratitude.他内心充满了感激之情.The basket was full of flowers.篮子里盛满了花.5) compare„with 与......作比较

6) drop in 顺便走访,也可用于drop in on sb.顺便走访某人.7) Above all \"首先,最重要的是\" 8) as long as so/as+adj./adv.+as 像......一样

Step 3 Writing Complete the paage then check the answers.Homework

Finish the workbook exercises.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 单项选择.1.A: Hellow! Would you like to go to the cinema with me tonight B: I\'m sorry, I can\'t.Father won\'t B me to go out in the evening.A.let B.allow C.offer D.help 2.We won\'t allow C n museum.But you are allowed _____ in the rest room.A.smoking; smoking B.smoke; smoking C.smoking; to smoke D.to smoke; to smoke 3.Be careful! The bowl C hot water.A.full of B.fill with C.is filled with D.is fulled of Self- reflection The Teaching Plan for Module5/Unit3 Language in use Topic Type of leon Revision Period(s) Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.Master the key words and structure.2.To practice the use of Compound word.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: Talk about you can or can\'t do something Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To talk about the rules with \"mustn\'t, can\'t, Don\'t… No….\" Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard.Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Use the structure \"allow or not allow doing sth.\" To explain the rules.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the structures.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step 1: Revision 1.Finish part 1 and 2.2.Check the answers and read the sentences in language practice.3.Review:

1)No+v.-ing! 如: No smoking! 不许吸烟! No joking! 不要开玩笑! 2)祈使句

否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示\"禁止\".如: Don\'t shout.不要喊叫.Don\'t make any noise.不要吵闹.3) You mustn\'t…

情态动词mustn\'t 可以表达\"禁止\"的概念.如: You mustn\'t take photographs of the exhibits in museums.博物馆中不得给展品拍照.You mustn\'t tell it to anyone.你决不可以告诉任何人.4)You can\'t…

can\'t 可以表示\"能力\",\"可能性\",也可以表示\"不允许\".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.如: In most museums you can\'t make any noise.在大多数博物馆里不能吵闹.5) You aren\'t allowed to…

本句型用来制止对方做某事.如: You are not allowed to touch the exhibits.不要触摸展品.Step 2 Finish the all exercises then check it.Step 3 Compound words (见书本P179) Exercises: Make new words using the words in Box A and Box B.A

bed cla down home post up wet B card room site stairs work mate load sick Homework Finish off the workbook exercises Review the language points in this module.Blackboard Writing Design 1)No+v.-ing! 2)祈使句

否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示\"禁止\".如: Don\'t shout.不要喊叫.3) You mustn\'t… 4)You can\'t…

can\'t 可以表示\"能力\",\"可能性\",也可以表示\"不允许\".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.5) You aren\'t allowed to… Self- Reflection 教学反思：

Module 6 Save our world 教案设计

一、教材内容分析

本模块以杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球为话题，让学生在了解地球危机重重的基础上，通过活动，考虑我们学生应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识。讨论话题源于周围环境，贴近生活，便于开展活动。教学中应结合学生实际情况，灵活调整教学内容，合理设置课时。适当进行拓展，以丰富学生知识，拓展学生视野，进行理想、人生责任的教育。

二、学情分析

通过两年的学习，学生已能用英语熟练地表达自己的看法和意见。本模块的话题是环境、资源，这是学生很熟悉也较感兴趣的话题, 但同时对学生的知识储备要求较高。首先要求学生通过多种途径了解地球环境、资源的现状。其次在教师预设的任务中，要使学生有话可说，但是这个话题涉及较多的知识，学生掌握的难度较大, 如果材料处理不当，会导致学生有话想说，却无法用英语表达的尴尬场面。因此在具体安排教学内容时，可由简到难，适当降低难度与要求，让学生更好地运用课本知识，达到提高综合运用语言能力的目的。

三、教学目标

1.语言知识目标 词汇 waste、energy、pollution、recvcle、reusable、reduce、reuse、repair、environmental、hopele、neceary、plastic、sort、harm、material 词组句型 instead of、do harm to、make a difference to、It’s+adj+to、stop from 语法 前缀、后缀构词法 功能 表达如何杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球 话题 以了解地球危机重重为基础，讨论如何拯救地球为话题

2．语言技能目标

听 听懂有关不同保护环境方法的对话，提高学生实际应用能力

说 能用本模块的生词、短语开展对话、讨论，介绍各自生活中保护环境的方法

读 了解地球环境的现状, 通过阅读掌握reduce，reuse，recycle的含义和重要性，进行简单的阅读技能训练

写 1．能用核心词汇写出简短的、表达观点的句子 2．能写出生存现状和保护措施，形成完整的计划性文章

演示与表达 能向全班做有关生存现状和保护措施的发言与展示 3．学习策略目标

通过合作讨论、游戏、竞赛等多种活动形式，实现在用中学，学而能用的原则。

认知策略 联系，归纳，推测等技能。

调控策略 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。 交际策略 学习运用恰当句子表达自己的观点。 资源策略 能利用多种途径及学习资源查找信息，用所学内容进行真实交际。 自学策略 能借助词汇图掌握单词，形成话题联想的习惯，培养学生的阅读能力技巧。 合作学习策略 关心周围的生存现状和保护措施, 交流并分享各自的观点并形成最终观点。

4．文化意识目标

引导学生关注社会，关注身边的事和人，关心周围的生存现状和保护措施，对学生进行环保意识的渗透。同时让他们了解保护环境离我们很近，身边有许多机会，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识和关爱地球之心5．情感态度目标 （1）通过开展生动活泼的教学活动，激发学生的兴趣。

（2）培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。 同时也积极鼓励学生参与社会实践活动。

（3）引导学生与他人合作，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务，尽情享受学习的乐趣。

四、重点难点

1.教学重点

重点话题：How to be green 2.教学难点

（1）前缀、后缀构词法及其积累

（2）能用恰当地道的英语表达对保护环境的看法。 3．突破途径

以话题为核心，通过个人思考、小组及班级活动等不同途径，在听、说、读、写中使单词及句型以不同的形式反复出现，在足够的输入中，达成有效的语言输出。

五、教材处理

1、任务 核心任务：能够运用所学句型结构向不同的朋友交流自己关于保护环境的看法。三个环节如下：

pre-task：学生通过多种途径了解有关环保的知识，激活背景知识。

Task-cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化“地球现状和保护环境的途径”的表达能力，为完成核心任务做好铺垫。

post-task：达成任务，展示成果，自我评价，反馈学习情况。

2、课时安排

Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.

Period Two: Unit 2 Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Period Three: Unit 3 Language in use (1) Period Four: Unit 3 Language in use (2)

六、教学设计

Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal. Step 1: Warming-up According to the words, let the students say something about our world and describe it.设计意图: 从学生所了解的世界入手，利用学生已有的认知水平进行头脑风暴，主要为下一步世界中最主要的环境问题的引出做准备工作。

Step 2: Lead-in 1.Watch a video about our world.

2.Discu: What problems did you see?

3.Work in pairs.Say what you should do about these problems.设计意图:

视频让学生更直观地了解到我们的地球所面临的日趋严重的环境问题。通过观看，思考和讨论，给学生提供一个运用英语的机会，培养了学生注意的能力和主题理解能力，更激发了学生保护环境的意识。

Step 3: Listening

1.Look at the photos.Describe and check them.(Activities 1 and 2)

2.Listen and read.Then do Activties 6 and 7.

3.Discu: Look at Activity 5.Choose one of them and answer it. 设计意图:

听力是学生的一个难关，因此在设计中应由浅入深，教师加以引导和帮助。活动五在课文中没有直接原文答案，为降低难度，可让学生选择回答，让各层次的学生都有事情可做，都有事情会做，提高参与率和成就感。

Step 4: Speaking

1.Watch a video.

2.Disu: Think of some ways of environmental protection.Complete the table with the ways.设计意图:

保护环境并不只是政府的事情，其实在我们身边有许多我们能做而常被忽视的。通过观看同龄人的行为，让学生了解我们不该做的很多，我们该做的更多。让学生考虑应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识，培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。

Homework: 1.Review Unit One.

2.Workbook: Page 133 Vocabulary and Listening.

3.Choose one of the two and finish it.

(1) Think of more ways of environmental protection.

(2) Find out some problems around you and think how to solve them.Then write it down. Period Two: Unit Two Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Step 1: Warming-up

1.Check the homework.

2.Introduce some environmental groups.

3.Do a questionnaire.设计意图:

在社会中，包括政府在内，有许多的机构，单位，组织和个人都关心和保护着环境。通过问卷让学生领悟我们虽小，但我们可做的很多，而且这些可做的事就在我们的身边，就在我们的日常生活里，从而为课文的引出做好铺垫。

Step 2: Lead-in

Look at the pictures.Say which things are better for the environment and why.设计意图:

利用学生最熟悉的生活用品比较，在一定的语境中进行讨论和学习词汇。小组讨论可以集思广益，加深对课文的理解。而进行有意义的交流是词汇学习的上上策，培养学生词不离句学语言的好习惯。并且让学生从自身的感受和生活的经验来判断, 激发学生热爱生活、关心生活和保护环境的意识。

Step 3: Reading

1.Read the paage.

2.Work in pairs and answer the questions.(Activity 6)

3.Read the paage again and check the things you should do.Then give reasons for what you should or shouldn’t do.(Activities 4 and 5) 设计意图:

通过慢速和快速阅读培养正确的阅读方法，让学生了解文章的主旨，同时培养学生的猜词能力，提高阅读能力。通过学生自己的阅读，主动去发现问题，提出问题，并通过不同途径解决问题。通过有意义的回答问题这种说的练习不但加深了对文章的理解，而且突出了语言的交流功能。

Step 4: Writing

1.Work in pairs.Make some lists of things.

2.Make suggestions about how to be green.Give reasons，please.设计意图:

本部分为写作活动，与学生们的学习密切相关，同时也巩固先前的阅读所学知识，具有一定的难度，因此有必要提供范文。

1.本活动为写前活动，目的是收集信息，让学生深度理解三个重要词汇。

2.本活动是任务的主要阶段，首先让学生重温根据先前的图表信息，然后制定环保建议和理由。

Homework:

1.Review Unit Two.

2.Workbook: Page 134 Reading and writing.

3.Choose one of the two and finish it.

(1) Make suggestions about how to be green and give reasons.

(2) Make a list of things that you have done something to help our environment. Period Three: Unit three Language in use (1) Step 1: Warming-up

1.Check the homework.

2.Watch a video.设计意图:

通过观看视频,让学生了解本堂课的主题是利用我们所学到的知识去讨论问题，解决问题。最重要的是如何从身边的小事开始，从我做起去保护环境，爱护环境，以达到学习和生活紧密联系。

Step 2: Practice

1.Complete the conversation with the correct form of the phrases in the box.(Activity 9)

2.Read the ideas on protecting the environment.Then practise and answer the questions.(Activities 6 and 7)

3.Work in pairs.Discu the question.(Activity 8) 设计意图:

练习经过重组，难度有简到难，逐步深入，让学生自然地接受，消化。练习8又为下一步的讨论打下基础。

Step 3: Discu

Work in pairs and talk about the picture.设计意图:

学生通过任务，分享各自的智慧火花，使口语能力得到提高。通过交流看法，多角度、多元化促进学生对知识的掌握和运用。从听、说逐渐过渡到下一步的写，由口头输出的流畅性过渡到笔头输出的精确性。

Step 4: Module task

1.Discu what you can do about pollution.

(1) Decide what type of pollution you want to talk about.It could be water pollutiong, air pollution, waste, cutting down forests, etc.

(2) Discu your topic.Say what you think about the problem and what can be done.

设计意图:

本部分为写作活动，可以巩固先前的阅读所学知识。本环节分为两个步骤：第一步是挑选内容，第二步是讨论和语篇写作。第一步对于英语基础不好的学生尤为有用。要求学生独立写作，同时又将学生自主学习与小组合作活动相结合，旨在培养学生独立自主的学习能力及分享观点，相互协作的能力。

2.Make a poster to tell others to protect the environment. 设计意图:

活动过程可让学生先看一些例子，然后选择一个话题，收集相关资料；为招贴画选择一个标题；对招贴画进行描述介绍；进行评比打分，选择优秀作品在班级报栏展示。该活动有助于培养学生资料收集、筛选的能力，培养学生的主题意识和话题意识，以及小组成员的合作意识。让学生明白不光自己要有环保意识，更要号召、呼吁身边的人一起爱护环境，保护环境。

Homework:

1.Review Language in use (1).

2.Finish the module task.Period Four: Unit three Language in use (2) Step 1: Word games

1.Make new words.According as the word, make new words as many as you can.

2.Make new words.Join the words in Box A with the parts of words in Box B.Step 2: Practice

1.Do Activities 2, 3 and 4.

2.Workbook: Grammar and vocabulary.设计意图:

加前、后缀是英语中最常见的扩充词汇的方式，也是学习英语必须掌握的构词法。但常用的前缀、后缀非常多，因此应指导学生在学习的过程中自己学习，讨论，研究和发现其规律，并注意平时的积累。 Homework:

1.Review Language in use (2).

2.Finish the module work.教学反思：

Module 7 Australia教学设计

Unit 1 I’m looking for the photos that you took in Australia!

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: crocodile, shark, hand, have a look at, alongside, detail Key structure: The attributive clause with that

2.Listening skill: To understand conversations involving the Attributive Clause in listening.Improve the students’ listening ability.

Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP) Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Lead in Divide the cla into several groups and each group has two, three or more students.One student acts as a travel agent, the other students want to travel.The agent will recommend some cities or countries to the others.设计意图: 复习七八年级所学过的关于城市和国家的知识，自然的过渡到本单元的关于澳大利亚的重点对话。并且可以培养同学之间的合作与交流，提高会话能力。

Step 2 Presentation Show students a picture of Sydney Opera House and tell them ―Tony’s father has been to Australia.He visited Sydney Opera House.‖ Then get them to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions: 1.Where else did he visit? 2.What animals did he see? 设计意图: 因为是一篇较长的对话，所以让同学们带着问题去听，第一遍不要求逐字逐句听懂，但要能回答出简单的问题。

Step 3 Read and repeat Get the cla to read the dialogue.Then ask them to read in pairs.Step 4 Complete the table After the students are familiar to the dialogue, ask them to complete the table in Activity 4.设计意图: 在这一步骤中,让学生从说转移到写上,并且让同学们在完成表格的同时更加熟悉课文。

Step 5 Answer questions Get students to answer questions about the dialogue.Step 6 Grammar Show students several sentences involving The Attributive Clause in this unit.Ask them to think of the use of the word ―that‖.

设计意图: 在本单元只是呈现一下定语从句的概念，让同学们对此有一个印象，而不必强调如何去改写定语从句。在以后的两个单元的逐步练习中再让同学们慢慢地对此语法熟悉起来。

Step 7 Homework

1.Read the words and the dialogue frequently.Try to recite part of the dialogue.2.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.

Unit 2 The camel that I rode had a bad temper.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: grape, ham, lamb, outback, relative, sheep, spir, surfing, wine, helicopter, purple, similar, ours, cricket, rugby, sunshine, expreion, mate, temper, lifestyle Key structure: 1.The restrictive attributive clause with that 2.Reading skill: The students can read the long paage and can write some notes about it.Improve the students’ reading ability.

Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP) Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Get the whole cla to play a game called ―I describe, you gue‖. 设计意图: 由游戏开始上课,同学们会比较感兴趣，尤其是九年级的同学。通过游戏的形式让同学们能够较轻松地读懂并理解带定语从句的句子。 因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。

Step 2 Read and check Get the students to read the paage once or twice quickly, and after that ask them to find the information about some numbers.Then check the true sentences.设计意图: 第二单元编排了一篇长课文，教师可以把它当成阅读课来上。所以先让同学们快速阅读，然后找出一些关键句，并能够判断句子的正误。能够做到以上两点就可以了。 Step 3 Read again and write notes.Get the cla to read the paage again, but this time read it more slowly.Then ask them to take some notes for Tony.The students can finish this job individually or they can discu with their partners.设计意图: 通过做笔记，能够使同学们加深对课文的理解，并且加强同学们的归纳理解能力。 Step 4 Read and repeat After the students are familiar to the paage, ask them to read the paage after the tape.Then they can read by themselves.Step 5 Explain some useful expreions.

The teacher explains some useful expreions and grammar points.Step6 Homework

1.Read the words and the paage frequently. 2.Copy the words and expreions.3.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 3 Language in use Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: water sports, grey, ancestor Speaking skill: To say sentences involving the attributive clause.Writing skill: To write sentences involving the attributive clause.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP) Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Play another ―I describe, you gue.‖ 设计意图: 本单元是一个复习单元,以游戏引出话题，活跃课堂气氛，鼓励学生大胆表达。因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。（让同学们事先准备好图片）。在做这个游戏时，同学们能够很轻松地说出带定语从句的句子，能够在游戏当中掌握好本单元的语法重点。

Step 2 Read a dialogue Read a dialogue completed by the teacher and ask the students to make similar dialogues.Try to use the Attributive Clause.Read the conversation and pay attention to the underlined words .A: Do you want to see my photos? B: what photos? A: The photos that I took in Australia.1.A: What surprised you most in Australia?

B: The thing that surprised me most was the weather! 2.A: What do you call that famous Australian animal? The one that can jump very high.

B: Oh, you mean a kangaroo.3.A: What’s the name of that dangerous animal?

B: The one that is green? That’s a crocodile.

设计意图:本单元是复习单元，尽可能让同学们运用本单元所学过的知识来自己编对话，做到灵活运用，大胆创新，并且还有助于合作与交流。

Step 3 Join the sentences.

Ask the students to join the sentences with “that”.(句子见幻灯片)

Step 4 Finish Activity 1 Read the paage and underline all ― that‖ in the Attributive Clause.

设计意图:在第三和第四步中，着重点在写上。经过了前面两个单元的学习，本单元的重点是让同学们能够写出带定语从句的句子，这也是本模块的一个任务。

Step 5 Around the world Show students a picture of Australian athlete and hero.Ask students to learn from her.Step 6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook.教学反思：

Module 8 Photos Teaching Plan

一、题材内容

本模块以“摄影”为话题，借此让学生描述自己最理想的摄影作品。通过本模块的学习，学生进一步学习定语从句的用法。为学生提供了充足的语言实际运用的机会。学生可以围绕这一话题进行大量的听、说、读、写方面的语言实践活动,促使学生更有意识地自觉学习英语。语法难点仍是定语从句。教学中教师应随时随地灵活利用各种素材组织教学过程和内容，充分调动学生的积极性。 教学目标： 1)语言知识： 语音 能够准确掌握句子中的单词重读。 词汇 trouble,shot,kid,expect,historic,size,beauty,category,movement,feature,include,rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, frightened 词组 on the left/right, pick up, even though 语法 能使用who, which 引导的定语从句。 功能 Measuring; Describing people and things.话题 以“摄影”为话题。 2)语言技能：

听 Identifying photos from descriptions.说 Describing photos.读 Transferring information to a table.写 Writing a description of a photograph.演示与表达 能够向他人介绍自己的摄影作品。 3)学习策略

学习一定程度形成自主学习，有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。 认知 联系，归纳，推测等技能。学习查词典,阅读报刊,上网等提高自学能力。 调控 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。 交际 学习运用恰当词语介绍自己的摄影作品。 资源 通过报刊、书籍、网络等其他资源获取更多简单英语的有关摄影的信息。 自学策略 能够根据自己的情况预习教材并进行拓展。 合作学习策略 能够根据小组内同学的特长分工合作， 积极参与讨论，互相学习，取长补短，注意从他人的演示中汲取经验,注意学习策略共享。 4)文化意识：乐于了解世界各地人们审美观念。

5)情感态度：培养学生互助合作的情感素质。参加各种英语活动,感受学习的乐趣，克服困难，在新环境中进一步树立准确的语言学习观，通过欣赏他人的摄影作品，提高自己的审美情趣。

6)任务:能够描述自己的摄影作品。 教学重点和难点：

重点：1．通过谈论自己的摄影作品，训练学生的听、说、读、写能力； 2. who,which引导的定语从句。

难点： 掌握使用who,which引导的定语从句。 教学方法：

基于课程改革的理念及“第二语言习得论”,培养实现人的可持续发展和人的主体精神的自我完善和发展所必需的能力和素质，运用任务型教学途径，围绕核心任务，设定小任务，开展和谐愉悦的课堂活动，强调兴趣第一的原则,初步设计“P—T—P”自主学习立体模式：pre-task„task-cycle„post-task。

二、教材处理

核心任务：能够收集、拍摄自己最喜欢的作品，并能运用所学句型结构谈论他们。 三个环节如下：

pre-task：学生联系生活实际，激活背景知识。

task –cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化使用who,which引导的定语从句来谈论摄影作品的表达能力，为完成任务做好铺垫。 post-task：达成任务，展示成果，反馈学习情况

三、教材安排

根据学生学习英语的特点和规律，我们把本模块划分为4课时：

Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking Period 2: Reading

Period 3: Writing& Around the world &Module Task Period 4: Language in use 注：教学时应根据学生的学习水平、生活实际水平、接受程度及课堂出现的临时状况进行运用、调整及筛选。 『教学设计』

Title:

Module 8 Photos

Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking 1.Teaching Aims and Demands:

1) Key vocabulary: trouble,shot,kid,expect, on the left/right, pick up, 2) Listening skill: To understand conversations involving talking about photos.Improve the students’ listening ability.

3) Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know something about the Blues band, and practise making dialogue about photos.3.Teaching approach: Communicative teaching

4.Learning strategies: Bottom –up approach and listening to the tape and do some exercises.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (or Tape recorder, OHP, Blackboard) 6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision

Task 1: Recall what we have learned in Module 7.

1.Label the pictures with the words and expreions.(1).Read through the words and expreions in the box and have the Ss.Repeat them after you.

(2).Ask them to label them in the pictures on the screen.

(3).List some words which are connected with Australia.Ask students to speak out as many as they can.2.Tell something about Australia.Ask students to speak out as much as they can.

Step 2 Lead in

Task 2: Show some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, and lead in the topic of photos.Then learn the new words of this unit.1.Get them to enjoy some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, 2.Show them a picture of a concert.Let Ss gue what it is and what’s happing in this photo, then introduce the new words.3.Discu the picture, using the words in the box in Activity 1.Step 3 Listen and read Task 3: Listen to the tape and finish Activity 2 .Then check and call back the answers. 1.Play the recording while they just listen and focus on the words in Activity 1.2.Have them check their answer with a partner and play the recording again.3.Check and call back the answer from the whole cla.Task 4: Listen to the tape again and do Activity 4,5 .Then check and call back the answers. 1 Show them the questions in Activity 4.2.Play the recording and have them listen to the recording and focus on the questions in Activity 4.3.Play the recording again and have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.4.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Read the conversations in Activity 3.Make sure that Ss understand the conversation.6.Complete the sentences in their own words Activity 5.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 5: Let the Ss finish the Activity 6 by themselves.Then check and call back the answers. 1.Show them the questions in Activity 6.2.Have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.3.Then check and call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 6: Read 1.Play the recording again and pause after each phrase, asking the Ss.to repeat chorally and individually.2.Put the Ss.into groups of 5 to practise the dialogue.

3.They should repeat it several times, changing the roles each time.Step 4 Pronunciation

Task7: Listen and repeat the sentences in Activity7 on page 65.Make sure that they stre the underlined words.

1.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat the sentences.

2.Play the recording again.Ask the Ss to pay particular attention to the word stre.3.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat chorally and individually. Step 5 Speaking

Task 8: Work in pairs, choose a photo to talk about and finish Activity 8.Then check and call back the answers.

1.Get each of them to choose a photo.2.Ask them to work in pairs to share their descriptions.3.Call back some examples in a whole-cla setting, paying special attention to the use of the attributive clause guided by who \\ which..Step 6 Homework

1.Do Exx7.8&9 in the Wb.2.Oral work: Read the conversation of Activity 3.3.Preview Unit2 in Module 8. Period 2 : Reading 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Language knowledge: historic, size, beauty, category, movement, feature, include, rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, photographer, present, ceremony，even though 2) Reading skills: To detect and foster the students’ reading skills To get information from the reading material.

3) Emotion &Attitudes: To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points: To let the students know something about photo competition

and learn something about the differences among entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.3.Learning strategies: Communicative approach.4.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (Tape recorder, OHP) 5.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1:Help students to revise what was learnt in Period1of this module.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos. 2.Have the Ss.talk about them. Step 2 Preparation Task2: Let the Ss preview the new words and make them build the conception of entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos, then lead in the Activity 1.

1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos. 2.Have the Ss.talk about them.

Task 3: Learn the new words, then label the pictures with the words.1.Read through the words on the screen.Have the Ss.Repeat them after you.

2.Read the words separately and have them remember them. 3.Make some sentences with the words. 4.Call back the answers from the whole cla Step 3 Scanning and Skimming Task 4: Scan this paage, according to the content , finish Activity 3.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage as quickly as poible.2.Do Activity 3 .Complete the table and write notes 3.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Step 4 Reading Task5: Let the Ss read the paage by themselves in details, and do Activity 4.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the sentences in Activity 4.

2.Read the paage by themselves.And ask to finish the true or false exercises.3.Check the answers with the whole cla.Task6: Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, and finish Activity 5.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to listen and repeat the paage simultaneously.2.Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, 3.Get the students to correct the sentences..4.Call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Language points in the paage.Task7: Finish Activity 6, Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage together loudly.2.Discu the following questions in groups.

1)―…read on to find out who the winners are.‖ where do you find who the winners are?

2)―…the fun which their fans are having.‖ Why are the fans having fun?

3) ―It succefully shows the rich culture which makes Beijing so famous..‖ Who or what shows the rich culture? 3.Share the ideas.Step 5 Pairwork Task6:Finish Activity 7.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the table.2.Work in pairs.Ask and answer about the places.3.Get Ss to talk about the claroom.Step 6 Practice 1.Do Exercise 10 on page 142 in the WB.

2.Give the students some time to recall what they’ve learned in this cla.Step 7 Homework 1.Read the text.2.Retell the text.

Period 3: Writing & Around the world &Module Task 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1) Writing skill: To write something about a photo.Improve the students’ writing ability .

2) Reading skills: To get information from the reading material A famous photo.

3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Learning strategies:Top-down and Interactive approach and do some exercises.3.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (Tape recorder, OHP) 4.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1: Help students to revise what was learnt in the last cla.

1.Revise the words and phrases.2.Let the Ss.retell the text. Step 2 Writing.Task2: Write sentences about their favorite photograph.1.Ask the Ss run through the questions in Activity 8 on Page67 and w rite sentences about their favorite photograph..

2.Call back the answers from the whole cla, having individuals read their sentences. Task3: Write a short paage describing their favorite photograph 1.Ask the Ss to do this individually.2.They can exchange it with a partner for peer correction.3.Have some students read their paage out to the whole cla.Step 3 Around the world Task4: Learn something about a famous photo.1.Ask the Ss.to look at the photo about the space.Tell the Ss.some knowledge about it.2.Read the text and answer any questions the Ss have.Step 4 Module Task Task5: Making a photo show.1.Activity 10 on page 71.Ask the Ss.to write about their favorite photo, saying what /who it is and why it is important to them.2.Activity 11 on page 71.Show their photo to their group.And tell others why they like it and why it is important to them..Answer any questions their group may have.Listen to the other members of their group talk about their photos.3.Activity12 on page 71.Put all the photos on the table and talk about them in groups.Step4 Recalling Recall what we have learned today.Step5 Homework 1.Do Ex.11 on page 143.

2.Do the Self-aement on page 143.

Period 4: Language in use

1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)To detect and foster the students’ understanding of grammar skills (skill) 2)To master the useful words and expreions(knowledge) 3)To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different

photos(emotion) 2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know how to use ―Which and Who ‖ to make attributive clause

3.Teaching approach: Communicative teaching

4.Learning strategies: Formal instruction and task-based approach and interactive practice.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media (recorder, OHP ) 6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Help students to revise what is learnt in 3 periods of this module.Step 2 Listen and speak Task1:Look at the photos in Activity 8,then discu them. 1.Get Ss.to describe cameras in the photos.2.Say how you think cameras have changed since their earliest beginnings.Task2: Practise listening 1.Ask the Ss.to listen to the conversation and do Activity 9 on page 70 individually. 2.Listen again and check with their partners.3.Call the answers back from the cla.Step 2 Write Task 3: Complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box.1.Ask the Ss.to complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box in Activity 1 and Activity 7.

2.Call the answers back from some students.Step 3 Language practice Task4: To summarize and consolidate the attributive clause guided by who/which.1..Read through the examples with the Ss.and make sure that they are familiar with the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.2.Ask the Ss.to repeat the sentences in the box.3.Ask―Can you make other similar examples?‖

4.Focus the Ss’ attention on the ways in which they are used: who/which.Task5: Do Activity2 and Activity 3 on page 68 individually. 1.Ask the Ss.to check with a partner.2..Ask the Ss.to read out the sentences.

3.Summarize the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.Task 6: Join the sentences with who or which.

1.Ask the Ss.to do Activity 4 on page 69 individually. 2.Call the answers back from some students.Task7: Use the knowledge of this module to make an instruction of Activity 5 . 1.talk about the two pictures.2.Then talk about the people in the two pictures.3.Now ask questions about the picture, and write down their answers. Step 4 Gue Task8: A gueing game

1.Look around the cla and describe something to their partner, using the knowledge of this module.2.Gue who/what I am describing. Step 5 Homework:

1.Finish all the exercises in the WB.2.Preview Module 9.教学反思：

Module 9 Cartoon stories Unit 1 We need someone like superman who can save Tony.Type of leon Listening and speaking Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:

To understand the conversation involving the use of the restrictive attributive clause; Emotional experience: To be able to retell Tony\'s experience and what his clamates did when Tony was in trouble .Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students\' listening and reading skills.2.To train students\' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: To ask and give information about one\'s favourite cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.The new words and phrases.ending, flash, laughing, over there, word, have a word with 2.Master the structure of restrictive attributive clause with that, Which and who.1.Remember the new words of this unit.2.do some exercises by using them,and make more sentences.Teaching procedure Step1 Greeting and revision Say hello to everyone.Revise the grammar by doing some exercises The boys _______are playing football are from Cla One.Football is a game _______is liked by most boys.The school in _______he once studied is very famouse.We bought a book ________had lots of cartoons in it.Step2 Presentation 1).Remember the words in the box of activity 1 (with time limit--30s) 2).Complete the sentences with words what you have remembered A _______________is a person who plays a part in a story, and the _______is the person who plays the main part.A ___________cartoon is one which doesn\'t make you ________, such as a ____________of a news story.A cartoon in which the hero saves someone is a story with a happy___________.A ________is a story you tell to make people laugh.Step 3 Listen and read.1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask and answer in activity 4 1).What does Betty think the ending will be 2).Why is the situation no laughing matter 3).How do you think Superman can save Tony

4).When will Tony poibly find out that his friends have got the camera 5).Why does Betty says she\'ll be Superman 3.Explain the language points 1)This is serious.这是很严肃的.2)But it\'s no laughing matter.但这不是开玩笑的事情.3)to have a word with 和某人说句话 4)That\'s good news.那是好消息.5)Here you are.给你.6)in deep trouble 处于险境中 7)Oh dear!噢, 天啊! dear adj.①亲爱的, e.g.Dear Sir./ My dear.②昂贵的 (expensive) eg.That\'s a dear shop.③int.(表示伤心,焦急, 惊奇等) 呵! 哎呀 eg.Oh dear! serious (adj.) 严肃的,认真的 --- seriously (adv.) eg.Are you kidding or are you serious 你是开玩笑还是认真的

Grandma is seriously ill.祖母病的很重.4.Translation the whole conversation by students.5.Work in pairs to complete the sentences in activity 5 in your own words.Step4.Pronunciation and speaking Listen and repeat the sentences.Step5.Homework Do the WB activity 1.Learn the conversation by heart.Blackboard Writing Design 1.But it\'s no laughing matter.但这不是什么可笑的事情.2.Have a word with sb.和某人说句话.比较:Have words with sb.与某人吵架.3.That\'s a smart idea!等于that\'s a good idea.4.Be in deep trouble.处于大麻烦/险境中.Self- reflection

Unit 2

There are several fan clubs in China which have held birthday parties for Tintin.Type of leon Reading and writing Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:

1.To get information from the reading material about cartoon stories.2.To learn some new vocabulary.Emotional experience: To learn more expreions of describing cartoon stories.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students\' listening and reading skills.2.To train students\' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: 1.To know more about many cartoon of China and abroad; 2.To write about a cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.To understand the paage, 2.To learn the restrictive attributive clause with that, who and which 1.To get the main idea of each paragraph.2.Find out the restrictive attributive clause in the paage and explain them.Teaching procedure Step1 Warming-up

1.Review the text of Unit 1

2.Let the students act out the dialogue in pairs. 3.Introduce the new words. Step 2: Reading 1.Talk about the following questions by groups.1).Do you like watching cartoons

2).What cartoons have you ever watched 3).Do you know the names of the following cartoon characters 4).Are they in recent cartoons or old cartoons

5).Use the words in the box to describe the cartoon characters.2.Listen to the paage to find out and check your answers.Name of cartoon Recent/Old Description Nemo Shrek the Monkey King Tintin Snoopy 3.Read the paage and find out the sentence which best summarizes the paage in activity 4.4.Listen to the paage again and choose the correct answer.1).The Monkey King is a cartoon character which_______.a) causes problems in heaven b) has travelled to the moon 2).Shrek is a monster who__________.a) falls in love with a prince b) was born from stone 3).Nemo is the name of a _________.a) fish which is caught by a diver b) big, fat cat which is very lazy 4).Snoopy is a lovable dog which was created by____. a) Tintin

b) Charles Brown\'s 5.Work in pairs and answer the questions in activity5.Step 3.Key words and expreions 1.favourite n.喜欢的东西/人 adj.特别喜欢的 2.series n.系列(单复同形) 3.translate v.翻译 translation n.翻译, 转化 translator n.翻译者 4.Belgian n.比利时人 adj.比利时人的 Belgium n.比利时 5.create v.创造 creation n.创造

creative adj.有创造力的

6.orange-and-white 橘白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的

如果用表同一方面情况(如说明性质,颜色,物质)的两个或两个以上的形容词来作定语需用and连接.7.ever since 从„开始

从他退休以来,已经在这呆五年了.He has been here for 5 years, ever since he retired.8.But it is above all the jokes played by the monkey that people remember.it 引导的强调句用来对句中某一成分加以强调.结构:\"It is (或was) +强调部分+ that (或who)„

Step 4.Homework 1.Writing: try to write a cartoon by yourself.2.Complete the activities 5~8 on P145 (WB) Blackboard Writing Design 1.fan club 影迷俱乐部

2.orange-and-white 橙白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的 合成词作定语 3.win the heart of sb.赢得某人的心 4.in heaven 在天宫里

5.mke a me 搞得乱七八糟 see a me 看到狼籍一片 „„

Self- reflection

Unit 3 Langugage in use Type of leon Revision and application Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals: To summarize and consolidate the language knowledge in this module.Emotional experience: To learn something about cartoons, to complete a task involving making a cartoon story Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Review the paive voices that students\' have learned.2.To train students\' ability of words and speaking.Realization of culture: Learn how to describe cartoon heroes, how to make a cartoon.Teaching aid Formal and interactive practice, task-based activities Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment To train students\' ability of words and speaking.To be able to help each other in communication.Exercise method.Writing and Oral practicing method.Teaching procedure Step 1.Greeting and revision 1.Review the text of Unit 2 2.Complete the sentences with which, who or that.1) The man_______we met was a cartoonist.2) He drew a dog___________had six legs.3) The cartoon and the cartoonist _________you\'re talking about is very famous.4) I know a teacher_______________is also a cartoonist.5) The picture____________I like best is the first one.6) Did the children watch a cartoon____________was drawn by Alice last Friday 3.Join the sentences with who, which or that.There\'s a Chinese artist.You must meet him.There\'s a Chinese artist (who) you must meet.Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask them what language point is demonstrated. Attributive Clauses (引导词的省略) Step4.Vocabulary 1).Complete the paage with the correct words in activity 8.2).Complete the paage with the correct phrases in the box in activity 9.Step5.Grammar 1.Attributive Clauses The cartoons (which / that) I like have lots of jokes.在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作宾语就可以省略,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作主语就不能省略,否则会造成结构混乱,影响表达.I\'ve got a camera which has got his name on it.Perhaps it\'ll be a cartoon which has a happy ending.It tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys.eg.I\'d love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make leons that are usually boring more interesting.2.Exercises 1.Do the exercises 1.2.3 in WB.2.多项选择.从下列ABCDE中选出符合题意的任意项.A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom (见附表)

《九年级英语外研版上教学工作总结.doc》

将本文的Word文档下载到电脑，方便编辑。

推荐度：

点击下载文档